PREAMBLE:
The Bachelor of Physical Education (B.P.Ed) – A four Year Programme is meant for preparing
quality teacher in Physical Education for Secondary / Senior Secondary School.
OBJECTIVES:
This programme shall strive to achieve the following objectives:
General Objectives:
1. To enable teacher to understand the nature, purpose and philosophy of physical education
at secondary stage.
2. To prepare teachers of physical education with broader educational perspective.
3. To develop for potentialities and organizing physical education programmes and
activities.
4. To develop capacity to organized leisure and recreational activities.
5. To empower them to inspire their students to actively participate in physical and yogic
exercises.
6. To enable teachers to develop personality, character, willpower, democratic values and
positive games and sports.
7. To make teachers capable of imparting basic knowledge about health, hygiene and
nutrition
8. To develop skills and competencies to organized school and community games and
sports.
9. To cultivate the sprit of sportsmanship, mental and physical alertness, scientific temper
and optimism.
10. To promote mental health, power of self- decision and self control, correct judgment and
action emotional stability and equanimity, respect for others and acceptance of authority
and rules
11. To promote appreciation and interest for indigenous games , sports and yogic exercises
12. To create awareness about health and hygiene in the community.
Specific Objectives
1. To lay down a sound foundation for higher and advance studies in Physical Education in
India.
2. To produce quality teachers in physical education.
3. To prepare students for advance coaching Diplomas in disciplines – Athletics,
Gymnastics, Hockey, Swimming, Basketball, Football etc.
4. To fulfill the eligibility criteria of Foreign Universities to get admission in post graduate
courses abroad since it is a basic and global programme.
5. To generate employment in the fields of Health Fitness and Gym- Management,
Physiotherapy, Journalism, Aquatics and Yoga.
6. To provide opportunity to talented students to excel in sports and become outstanding
sports persons.
7. To promote mass participation in Physical Education activities (Games, Sports Displays
etc) through intra – mural and Extra- mural programmes.
4
TITLES OF THE SUBJECT FOR BACHELOR OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(B.P. Ed.) – FOUR YEAR PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMME
Session: 2010-2011
B.P. Ed. FIRST YEAR (THEORY) – PART A (Annexure-A)
1. English and Communication Skills (Paper-I).
2. Punjabi Compulsory / History and Culture of Punjab (Paper-II).
3. History of Physical Education (Paper-III).
4. Educational Psychology, Guidance and Counseling (Paper-IV).
5. Applied Anatomy and Physiology (Paper-V).
Note:
1. The subject of Environmental Studies shall be read as per the guidelines of the Panjab
University, Chandigarh.
2. B.P.Ed.-First Year--Scheme of study of Part-A & B is given in Annexure-A, followed by
syllabus for Part-A (Theory)
3. B.P. Ed. --First Year syllabus for Part –B (Activity --Skills & Prowess) is given in Annexure-I
at the end of the theory syllabus.
5
ANNEXURE – A (Pages)
Bachelor of Physical Education (B.P. Ed.) – Four Year Professional Programme Scheme of Study
Part-A & B.
B.P. Ed. — First Year
Part-A (Theory)
Paper Title of the Subjects with Code Credit Mark Internal
Assessment
Paper-I English and Communication Skills (ECS) 1 90 10
Paper-II Punjabi (C) PBI / History and Culture of
Punjab(HCP)
½ credit for
each subject
45 marks
for each
subject
5 marks for
each subject
Paper-III History of Physical Education (HPE) 1 90 10
Paper-IV Educational Psychology, Guidance and
Counselling (EPGC)
1 70+20*P 10
Paper-V Applied Anatomy and Physiology (AAP) 1 70+20*P 10
*Environment Education
-- -- --
*P-Stands for marks for practical component.
Part-B (Activity – Skills and Prowess)
Paper Contents of Games and Sports Credit Mark Internal
Assessment
Athletics Teaching of Fundamentals, Rules
and Regulations and Measurements
of Fields
1 80 20
Gymnastics -do- 1 60 15
Football -do- 1 60 15
Basketball -do- 1 60 15
Wrestling -do- 1 60 15
Boxing -do- 1 60 15
Weight Training, Wt.
Lifting, Power Lifting
and Best Physique
-do- 1 60 15
Swimming -do- 1 60 15
Judo -do- 1 60 15
Light Apparatus
Activity / Calisthenics
Set of Exercises –2 counts, 4
counts, 8 counts and 16 counts
1 80 20
NOTE: 1. To accommodate more inter-school and inter-college games in B.P.Ed.-Second Year, Swimming,
Gymnastics and Judo will be taught/completed in B.P. Ed.-First Year, w.e.f 2006-07.
2. Each student is required to pass separately in theory, practical and respective assessment.
3. Six hours per day will be devoted for theory and practice i.e. three hours for theory and three hours for
practice / practical work.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
*The compulsory subject of Environment Education would be offered by the students in the First Year of
Undergraduate Classes in all streams (Arts, Commerce, Science, Computer Application, Biotechnology,
Education etc.)
6
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-First Year
B.P. Ed. : First Year
Paper : I
Time : 3 Hrs.
ENGLISH --
COMMUNICATIONS SKILLS
(ECS)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90
Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Book Prescribed: Colours of Expression by Harbhajan Singh Published by Publication
Bureau, Panjab University, Chandigarh.
Section-A
Unit-I Text 30 marks
(1) Story:
One essay type question on Summary/Character/Incident
(one out of two with internal choice.) (10 marks)
(2) Prose:
Short questions to test student’s grasp (10 marks)
(3) Poetry:
Summary (one out of two with internal choice) (5 marks)
Paraphrase/Explanation of a Stanza (one out of two with internal choice) (5 marks)
Unit-II Language through Literature 20 marks
(i) Vocabulary/Match Columns/Pair of Words (12 marks)
(From Prose and Stories of the Text)
(ii) Synonyms and Antonyms (8 marks)
(8 out of 13 from the Text)
Section-B
Unit-III Grammar 20 marks
1. Tenses and Sequence of Tenses
2. Voice
3. Narration
4. Non-Finites (Infinitive, Gerund, Participle)
5. Determiners and Modals
6. Degrees of Comparison
Unit-IV Language-in-Use 20 marks
1. Letter-Writing (Personal and Applications) (10 marks)
2. Translation from English into M.I.L. (from text) (10 marks)
7
IMPORTANT INSTRUCTION FOR PAPER SETTER AND EXAMINER
Testing
UNIT-I
Questions to be set in ‘Do as directed’ form, 15 questions to be set and students will be required to
attempt any 10. Each question carries 2 marks.
UNIT-II
From Part-A: Three types of letters to be set and the students will attempt any one. Letter writing will
carry 15 marks.
From Part-B: Three questions to be set offering internal choice to the students and they will be
required to do one question carrying 10 marks.
UNIT-III
Part-A: Three questions with internal choice to be set. Students will attempt any one. The question
will carry 15 marks.
Part-B: Two questions with internal choice to be set. Students will attempt one. The question will
carry 10 marks.
UNIT-IV
From Prose and Story sections, two questions to be set offering internal choice. Students will
attempt any one question. The question will carry 10 marks.
From Poetry section, two questions (summary or theme) to be set offering internal choice. Students
will attempt one question. The question will carry 10 marks.
8
srIrk isiKA dI sn;tk iDgrI de c;r s;l; pRoFESnl pRogr;m tiht
pMj;bI l;JmI, pihle s;l lXI inrw;rt p;WkRm
bI>pI>aELD : pihl; B;g
pepr : II
sm" : itMn QMTe
pMj;bI l;JmI kuLl aMk : 50
sl;n; ilKt pRIiKA : 45
p;s hoN lXI
QLTo-QLT aMk : 18
QrelU mul"kN : 05
p;WkRm
iXk;XI-1
mer; ipMD – ig> guridt isMQ, s;iht pRk;sn, cMDIgxH (isrf dUj; B;g inbMw ‘jnm sme' dIA' rIt" to'
lE ke’ mrn sme' dIA' rIt"’ tLk)
iXk;XI-2
r;STrI ate aMtr-r;StrI msilA' ‘te leK rcn;
iXk;XI-3
pLtr-ivh;r – pLtr ate t;r (Telegram)
iXk;XI-4
ivh;rk iva;krn
iXk;XI-5
anuv;d
iXk;XI, qIm ate aMk" dI vMD
1. inbMw pustk ivco' pRSn-PuLtr – s;r ivS;, s;ihtk ate siBa;c;rk mul"kN ‘te aw;irt / (c;r ivco'
do) 7+7= 14 aMk
2. r;StrI ate aMtr-r;StrI msilA' ‘te leK rcn; (c;r ivco' do) 7 aMk
3. pLtr ate t;r (telegram) leKn 6 aMk
(c;r ivco' iXk)
4. ivh;rk iva;krn – suLw-asuLw Sbd, v;k, ivcr;m icMn ate muh;vre
2x6 = 12 aMk
5. vp;rk / pRofESnl iviga;pn d; aMgrejI to' pMj;bI ivc anuv;d
6 aMk
suZ;XIA' pustk"
k;lj pMj;bI iva;rkn – D;> hrkIrt isMQ, iG> l;l isMQ, pMj;b sTeT yUnIvrisTI TeksT buk
borD, cMDIgxH .
pMj;bI l;JmI, B;g pihl; lXI inrw;rt p;WkRm ‘te aw;irt pepr
sELT krn sbMwI jrUrI ihd;iXt"
9
kuLl aMk : 50
sl;n; ilKt pRIiKA lXI inrw;irt aMk : 45
p;s hoN lXI QLTe-QLT aMk : 18
QrelU mul"kN : 5
yuinT-1 (15 aMk)
pRSn-1
pustk ‘mer; ipMD’ de dUje B;g n;l sMbMiwt inbMw" (inbMw ‘jnm sme' dIA' rIt"’ to' lE ke inbMw
‘mrn sme' dIA' rsm"’ tk ) ivco' do tr" de pRsn puze j;N :
P) inrw;irt inbMw" de a;w;r ‘te pustk d; ivs; j" s;ihtk, siBa;c;rk mul"kN (do co' iXk) 8 aMk .
a) ikse iXk inbMw d; s;r, ivs; j" mul"kN (do ‘co' iXk) 7 aMk .
yuinT-2 (7 aMk)
pRSn-2
r;StrI ate aMtr-r;STrI msilA' ‘te leK ilKN lXI ikh; j;ve .
(do ‘co' iXk) 7 aMk
yuinT-3 (5 aMk)
pRSn-3
do ivSe aMikt kr ke ikse iXk ‘te pLtr ilKN lXI ikh; j;ve .
ate
do ivse aMikt kr ke ikse iXk ‘te t;r (Telegram) ilKN lXI ikh; j;ve .
noT: iXs yUinT ivco' c;r pRsn puLz ke pRIiKArqIA' lXI dohrI ivklp coN rLKI j;ve B;v pRIiKArqI
nUM pLtr j" t;r ivco' koXI iXk ivklp cuN skN dI vI KuLLl hove ate cuNe gXe ivklp ivc pR;pt do
iviSa" ivco' ikse iXk Pupr ilKN dI vI KuLl hove .
(c;r ‘co' iXk) 5 aMk
yuinT-4 (8 aMk)
pRSn-4
p;WkRm ivc inrw;irt ivh;rk iva;krn de c;r B;g hn . hr B;g de do-do aMk inrw;irt kr ke sv;l puze j;N:
P) do asuLw Sbd ilK ke Pun" d; suLw rUp ilKN lXI ikh; j;ve . (2 aMk)
a) do asuLw v;k ilK ke Pun" d; suLw rUp ilKN lXI ikh; j;ve . (2 aMk)
X) iXk pMktI / v;k (ibn" ivSr;m icMn" de) ilK ke ivsr;m icMnH lg;PuN d; inrdes idLt; j;ve .
(2 aMk)
10
s) itMn ivco' do muh;virA' de arq dLs ke v;k bN;PuN lXI ikh; j;ve . (2 aMk)
yuinT-5 (5 aMk)
pRSn-5
vp;rk j" pRofESnl iviga;pn d; aMgrejI to' pMj;bI ivc anuv;d krn lXI ikh; j;ve .
noT: anuv;d lXI idLt; j;N v;l; iviga;pn 2 j" 3 pMktIA' to' vLw nhI hoN; c;hId; .
(5 aMk)
11
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-First Year
B.P. Ed. : Ist Year
Paper : II
Time : 3 Hrs.
HISTORY AND CULTURE
OF PUNAJB (HCP)
Max. Marks : 50
Theory / Written : 45
Pass Marks : 18
Internal Assessment : 05
NOTE :
1. The candidates are required to attempt five questions out of nine.
2. First question is compulsory, it carries 9 marks and it will consist of nine short-answer type questions. The
candidate is required to attempt all the nine questions.
3. All questions carry equal marks.
UNIT –I
1. Society in the Punjab during the Afghan rule.
2. The Punjab under the Great Mughals.
3. Salient feature of the Bhakti movement and Sufism in the Punjab.
4.
UNIT –II
5. Guru Nanak : His teachings; concept of Langar and Sangat.
6. development of Sikhism (1539-11581): contributions of Guru Angad Dev, Guru Amar Das
and Guru Ram Das for the Development of Sikhism.
7. Transformation of Sikhism : Compilation of Adi-Granth ; martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev;
Guru Hargobind’s New Policy.
UNIT –III
8. Martyrdom of Guru Tegh Bahadur; foundation of the khalsa by Guru Gobind Singh.
9. Banda Bahadur and his achievements; Sikh struggle for sovereignty from 1716 to 1765; role
of dal khalsa, Rakhi, Gurmata and Misis.
10. Ranjit Singh’s rise to power; civil and military administration ; relations with the British.
UNIT –IV
11. Social change with special reference to the position of Women.
12. New development in language, literature, architecture in the Punjab during the Medieval
period.
13. Famous Folk tales of medieval Punjab.
Suggested Readings:
1. Singh, Kripal, History and culture of the Punjab, Part II (Medieyal Period).Publications
Bureau, Punjabi university, Patiala, 1990 (3rd edn.).N.B.: The required details and depth
would conform to the treatment of the subject in the above survey (This Book will also
from the basis of the short answer questions).
2. Grewal, J.S., The Sikhs of Punjab, The New Cambridge University History of India,
Orient longamn, Hyderabad, 1990.
3. Singh Khuswant, A History of the Sikhs, Vol. I: 1469- 1839, Oxford University Press
Delhi, 1991.
4. Singh fauja (ed)., History of the Punjab, Vol.III Punjabi University, Patiala, 1972.
12
5. Chopra, P. N., Puri, B.N., and Das, M.N., A social, cultural & economic History of India,
Vol.II, Macmillian, Delhi, 1974.
6. L.M. Johsi (ed.), History and Culture of Punjab, Part-I, Publication Bureau, Punjabi
University, Patiala, 1989 (3rd edn.) N.B. The required detail and depth would conform to
the treatment of the subject in the above survey (This book will also form the bases of the
short answer questions).
7. L.M. Joshi and Fauja Singh (edn.) History and Culture of Punjab, Vol. I, Punjabi
University, Patiala, 1977.
13
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-First Year
B.P. Ed. : 1st Year
Paper : III
Time : 3 Hrs.
HISTORY OF
PHYSICAL EDUCTION
(HPE)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 90
Minimum Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread
over the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal
choice i.e. the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in first
Question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Physical Education in Ancient India; Vedic Period, Epic Period, Buddhist Period, Rajput Period, Mughal Period
and British Period.
• Physical Education Institution of India: YMCA Madras, LNIPE Gwalior, Christian College of Physical
Education, Lucknow, HVPM Amaravati, G.C.P.E. Patiala.
• Sports Institutions of India, N.S.N.I.S. Patiala, S.A.I.
• Contribution of Indian and foreign leaders in the field of physical education and sports.
India: Sh. H.C. Buck, Prof. D.G. Wakharkar, Dr. P.M. Joseph, Dr. J.P. Thomas, Prof S.R. Mahindroo, Prof.
Karan Singh and Prof. Ajmer Singh.
Abroad: J.F. Gutts Muth, Per Herni Ling, Dioo Levis, John Baseer.
Unit-III Physical Education in the City States of Greece
Sparta
• Physical Education in Sparta
• The aim of Physical education in Sparta.
• Women in Sparta.
Athens
• Education at Athens
• Palaestra, gymnasium, the Ephebos.
• Physical Education and Sports in Rome.
• The Public Games: The Circus Maximus, the Colosseum, Sham Naval Battles, and the Gladiatorial Combats.
Unit-IV
Physical Education in India after Independence:
14
• Contribution of Akhadas and Vyayamshalas.
• The British influence of Gymkhana, Sports Club, and Physical-Training.
• Association of Indian Universities (AIU)-its role in the development and promotion of games and sports in the
affiliated Universities and Colleges of the country.
• Raj Kumari Amrit Kaur Coaching Scheme (1953).
• Central Advisory Board of Physical Education and Recreation (1954).
• National Plan of Physical Education and Recreation- 1956.
• National Discipline Scheme (NDS) – 1954.
• Adhoc Enquiry Committee - 1958.
• Kaul Kapoor Committee.
• All India Council of Sports – 1954.
• National Physical Fitness Programme – 1959.
• National Fitness Corps – 1959.
• National Sports Organisation / Association.
• Recommendation of Education Commission (Kothari Commission) 1964-66.
• Youth Welfare Programme.
• National Sports Awards :(Rajiv Khel Ratna Award, Arjuna Award, Dronacharya Award, Dhyan Chand Award and
Maulana Abul Kalam Azad Trophy).
Unit – V
• Ancient Olympic Games.
• Modern Olympic Games; and India.
• Asian Games; and India
• Commonwealth Games; and India
• Afro Asian Games; and India
• S.A.F. Games; and India
• National School Games and SGFI
• National Games.
Books Recommended
• Don Marrow, “Sports History” (2006) Human Kinetic Publisher inc.
• Lal, D.C. “History of Physical Education and Sports”(2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Mishra, Sharad “Reading in Physical Education and Sports”(2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B
EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Tirunaryanan & S. Harisharasarma, (1998) “An Analytical History of Physical Education”.
• Eraz Ahmed Khan, “History of Physical Education” (1964)
15
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-First Year
B.P. Ed. : Ist Year
Paper : IV
Time : 3 Hrs.
EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY,
GUIDANCE AND COUSELLING
(EPGC)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will carry
two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in respective
four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory.
UNIT-II PSYCHOLOGY AND EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY.
• Meaning, Definition, Nature and Scope of Psychology
• Meaning, Definition, Nature and Scope of Educational Psychology.
• Importance of Educational Psychology for the teacher.
• Historical Development of Educational Psychology.
• Psychology and its usefulness in the field of Physical Education.
• Methods of studying human behaviour: Introspection, observation method, experimental method, clinical and
case study methods.
UNIT-III GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT
• Meaning of growth and development.
• Nature of growth and development.
• Characteristics or principles of growth and development.
• Distinction between growth and development.
• Stages of growth and development.
• Physical, mental, emotional and social development during childhood.
• Principles of growth and development and their educational implications.
• Factors affecting growth and development – Heredity and Environment.
• Psychological and physical problems of an adolescent and the role of physical education and sports in solving
the problems.
ADOLESCENCE EDUCATION
Adolescence Education- Meaning, objectives; need for adolescence education and the role of the institution in
adolescence education. Skill development in adolescence education – Adolescence Reproductive and Sexual Health
(ARSH) Skills and skills for the teachers.
Unit-IV LEARNING
• Learning: Meaning, definition and Nature of learning.
16
• Factors affecting learning. Principles of learning.
• Laws and associated laws of learning given by Thorndike.
• Individual differences: Meaning, Definitions and Areas.
o Determinants and their roles in generating individual differences.
o Educational implications and provisions for individual differences in the educational institutions.
o
TRANSFER OF TRAINING
• Transfer of training: Meaning and definitions.
• Theories of transfer of training: Theory of mental discipline (Faculty Theory), Appreciation theory of Transfer
training, Theory of identical elements, theory of generalization, transposition theory of transfer training and
theory of ideals.
• Factors affecting transfer of training.
• Educational implication of transfer of training.
UNIT-V GUIDANCE AND COUNSELING
• Meaning and concept of guidance.
• Purpose and need of guidance programmes.
• Organisation of the guidance progrmame in schools.
• Meaning, Definition and types of counseling.
• Characteristics or qualities of an effective counselor.
• Principles of counseling, duties and functions of counseling.
Practical Part
The students under the supervision of a teacher will practice Introspection/Observation Methods of study of
human behaviour. Also practical sessions shall be arranged to provide experience of guidance and counseling
practices/services.
Books Recommended
• Singh Jeet and Vaid, Rajesh, “Physical Education and Sports Psychology” (2007)Sports Publication,
G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Gangopadhya, S. R. “Sports Psychology”, (2007) Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• K. K. Bhatia and et al, “Advance Educational Psychology of Teaching” Learning Process” (2005)
• Mangal S.K. “Advance Educational Psychology” (2004)
• Dweey John, “Psychology”(1998) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New Delhi 1998
• Mathur, S.S. “Educational Psychology” (1994)Vinod Pustak Mandir Agra.
17
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-First Year
B.P. Ed. : 1stYear
Paper : V
Time : 3 Hrs.
APPLIED ANATOMY
AND
PHYSIOLOGY
(AAP)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will carry
two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• An introduction to the anatomy and physiology of human body - levels of structural complexity within the body
(cells tissues, organs and systems).
• Meaning of Internal and External Environment.
• The structure and functions of the cell.
• A brief introduction to the human skeleton.
• Axial Skeleton – the skull, vertebral column, ribs and sternum.
• Appendicular Skeleton – The shoulder girdle with the upper limbs and the pelvic girdle with the lower limbs.
• Bone: Bone structure, types of bones (long bones, short bones, irregular bones and seasmoid bones), and
functions of bones.
• Definition of a joint. Types of joint (fibrous or fixed joints, cartilaginous or slightly movable and freely movable or
Synovial joints).
• Structural classification of muscles (skeletal, smooth and cardiac muscles and general characteristics of muscles
– elasticity, contractility and irritability).
Unit – III
• A brief introduction to the human nervous system.
• Structure and functions of the brain, spinal cord, and peripheral nervous system brain – cerebrum, midbrain,
pons, medulla oblongata, cerebellum; spinal cord - sensory nerves (afferent or ascending), motor nerve (efferent
or descending) and simple reflex arc; and peripheral nervous system.
• Autonomic nervous system.
• Sympathetic nervous system.
• Parasympathetic nervous system.
• Brief introduction to the endocrine system. Types, location, secretion and functions of glands; pituitary gland,
thyroid gland, parathyroid glands, adrenal gland, and hypothalamus, the pancreatic islets, pineal gland or body,
thymus gland, ovaries in the female and testes is in the male.
Unit – IV
• The blood: The structure, function and formation of blood cells; blood groups and their characteristics; and the
process of blood clotting and its regulation.
• The cardio-vascular system: The structure and functions of heart and major blood vessels of the body.
• Brief description of circulation of the blood, pulmonary circulation, systemic or general circulation, and portal
circulation.
18
Unit – V
• Brief introduction of the respiratory system: its organs structure and functions. Mechanism, control and types of
respiration.
• Brief introduction of the digestive system: its organs structure and functions. The process of digestion (ingestion,
propulsion, digestion, absorption and elimination).
• Secretion: juices and their functions.
PRACTICAL PART:-
• Identification of the bones of lower & upper limbs.
• Identification of the bones of torso.
• Identification of various joints of the body.
• Anthropometry kit, anthropometric measurements and their uses.
• Blood pressure and heart rate measurement techniques.
Books Recommended:-
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Gerard J Tortora and Bryan Derrickson, “Principles of Anatomy and Physiology” (2006)11th edition –
John Willy and Sons,inc. USA.
• Albert Bluisdall, “Human Anatomy and Physiology”(2001) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Rose and Wilson , “Anatomy and Physiology in Health Illness” (2001) 9th edition- Harcourt Publisher
Ltd.
• Winwood, R.S. and Smith, J. L. “Sears Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses” (1998)6th edition ( 1st
Indian edition)
• Gray A. Thibodean and Kelvin T. Patton, “Anthony’s Textbooks of Anatomy and Physiology” (1994)
14th edition Mosby year book inc. St. Louis Times Mirror, Mosby College Publishing
19
ANNEURE- I (Pages)
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
ATHLETICS (Track and Field) for Men and Women
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of athletics (Track and Field) for men and women including important
competitions and personalities of national and international repute.
2. Introduction of the event and its historical development with special reference to India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the sport/event.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of each event.
6. Importance of hygiene for an athlete.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Track Events
Sprinting Events
(a) Correct running style emphasizing on proper body position.
(b) Crouch start and its variations - fixing of the starting blocks, getting off the
block.
(c) Practice of starts with blocks using proper and different commands.
(d) Finishing techniques – Run Through, Forward Lunge and Shoulder Shrug.
(e) Rules& regulation of sprinting event.
Middle and Long Distance Running Events including Walking Events and Marathon Race
(a) Practice of standing start.
(b) Correct running style- emphasizing on proper body position and foot
placement.
(c) Proper arm & leg action.
(d) Running tactics.
(e) Rules & regulations.
Field Events
Long Jump
(a) Techniques:-Hang and Running in the Air Techniques.
(b) Teaching Stages: Approach run, take off, flying phase and landing.
(c ) Measurement of Long Jump Arena.
(d) Rules &Regulations for Competition.
Triple Jump
(a) Teaching Stages: Approach run, take off and landing for hop, step & jump,
Flying phase and landing
(b) Measurement of Triple Jump Arena
(c) Rules &Regulations for Competition
Evaluation Plan(Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
20
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
1. Brown L. Richard, “Fitness Running.” (2003)Human Kinetics USA.
2. Singh, Baljeet “Athletic Conditioniong.” (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
3. Novich,M.Max “Training and Conditioning of Athletes”,Lea & Febiger 600S. Washington square
Philadelphia,PA 19106 U.S.A.
4. Bosen,Ken O. “Track and Field Fundamental Techniques”, Patiala: N.I.S. Publication.
5. Dyson, Geoffrey HG, Edumndson, Joseph, “Athletics for Schools.” University of London
Press Ltd. 1969.
6. Doherty, J. Mannet, “Track and Field” Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice Hall Inc.
7. Dyoon, Geoffrey, G.H. The Mechanic of Athletics London University of London press
Ltd.,1962
8. Hodks, Gens.Application of Weight Training to Athletics. Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice
Hall Inc., 1962
9. Malhotra, Ashok Kumar A Guide to be an Athlete, Krishna Publication Books New Delhi.
10. Mohan, V.M. Athletics for beginners, Metropolitan Books New Delhi.
21
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
GYMNASTICS (Men and Women)
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Gymnastics for men and women including important competitions and
personalities of national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the game/sport.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of each event/item of gymnastics.
6. Importance of hygiene for a gymnast.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
MEN SECTION
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Developmental exercises
Exercises on wall bars, exercises on heavy beam, rope climbing, exercises
with medicine ball, pyramid formations and stunts.
Floor Exercises
Forward roll, backward roll, sideward roll, cart wheel, hand stand and forward
roll, backward roll to hand stand, Diving forward roll, side split, head stand, different kind of
scale, dive roll from best board and round off.
Parallel Bars
Mount from one bar, straddle walking on parallel bars, single and double step walk,
perfect swing, shoulder stand on one bar roll forward, roll side, shoulder stand and front on
back vault to the side(dismount).
Vaulting Table
Approach run and jump from the beat board, cat vault, squat vault and straddle
vault.
Horizontal Bars
Perfect swing on horizontal bars, single leg up start with swing, mill circle
forward, and mill circle backward.
Pommel horse
Perfect support position on pommel horse, single leg outward (front
support),single leg circle inward (front support) and half single leg circle.
Roman Rings
Perfect swing on roman rings, inverted hand stand and indicate forward with body
bent and straight.
Note : Roman ring will be taught, if facilities are available.
22
WOMEN SECTION
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Floor Exercise
Rolls-forward and backward, hand stand and roll forward, cartwheel and cat
leap.
Uneven Bars
Long higher bar to squat forward to rear support, swan, one leg squat rise to
scale and under wing dismount.
Beam
Jump to squat stand, knee scale with support, walk on the beam, standing
scale front ways and cat leap.
Vaulting
Squat vault.
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
1. Chakraborty, S “ Activities for Children Teaching Gymnastics Piramids” (2006-07) Sports
Publication, G-6,23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi. Stunrt, Nik.”
2. Competitive Gymnastics,” London:Paul and Company, Ltd.1970.
3. De Carle, Tom.., “Hand Book of Progressive Gymnastics.” Englewood Cliffs: N.J.Printice
Hall,1963.
4. Lokon,Newtwan,C. Wiliougbby.Rodert, J.” Complete Book of Gymnastics.” Englewood
Cliffs,N.J.Printice Hall, 1954.
5. Cochranu, Tunvi. S.”International Gymnastics for Girls and Women.”London: Addison Willy
Publishing Company.
6. Drury, Blanchu, J. and Schmid Andore B. ,” Gymnastics for Women.”California: National
Book, 1970.
6. Rules Book of Gymnastics Federation of India, Latest Edition.
23
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
FOOTBALL
Max.Marks:75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15 Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of football including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of
national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the game/sport.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a football player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Kicks:
Kicking with the inside of the foot.
Kicking with the instep of the foot.
Kicking with the outer instep of the foot.
Lofted kick.
Trapping:
Trapping rolling ball – with the inside, sole and instep of the foot.
Trapping bouncing ball with the sole.
Dribbling:
With the instep of the foot.
With the inside of the foot.
With the outer instep of the foot.
Heading:
From standing, running and jumping.
Throw-in
Feinting:
With the lower limb and with the upper part of the body.
Tackling :
Simple and slide tackling.
Goal Keeping :
Collection of balls.
Ball clearance – Kicking, throwing and deflecting.
Elementary formations and systems of play.
Functional training.
Lead up games/ side games.
24
ADVANCE SKILLS
Kicking :
Chip, in-swing and out-swing.
Volley (low drive, back volley and scissors volley).
Half volley.
Ball Reception and Control:
Receiving the rolling ball with inside and out side of the foot and changing direction.
Trapping the bowing ball with the abdomen.
Trapping the bowing ball with the lower leg.
Receiving the bowing ball with the inside and outside of the foot and changing the direction.
Receiving the flying ball with the inside, instep thigh, chest and head.
Dribbling:
Controlled dribbling, fast dribbling, straight dribbling, zigzag dribbling and dribbling
around/between obstacles.
Heading:
From running and jumping, heading for long distance and downward heading.
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Buxton. Ted, “Football Skills for Young Players”(2003)Angus Books Limited.
K.Kanika, “Football Coaching Manual” (2005)Sports Publications H.O: 7/26, Ansari Road ,Darya Ganj,New
Dehli.
Batty Cris,”Soccer Coaching the Modern way.” London; Faber and Faber,1969.
Hatty Lein ,”Soccer Coaching :The Modern Way.”London; Faber andFfaber ,1969.
Hedler and Stranghton,”Play Football with Pele.” London Tronoto,Sydney.
Larche,Harry, E.,”Techniques of Football Coaching.” London;A.S.Barnes &
Company,1969.
Lonziak Conrad,”Understanding Soccer Tactics.” London; Faber and Faber, 1966.
Soundrer’s Tom,”Play Better Soccer in all Colour.”London; Colling Geaegow,1972.
Singh,Gian,”Football Quiz.” Delhi; Services Publishing House,1977.
25
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
BASKETBALL
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Basketball including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the game/sport.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a basketball player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Player/s Stance and Ball Holding.
Passing and Receiving :
Two hand chest pass,
Two hand bounce pass,
One hand base ball pass,
Side arm pass.
Over head pass,
Hook pass.
Receiving :
Two hand receiving,
One hand receiving,
Receiving in stationery position,
Receiving while running,
Receiving while jumping.
Receiving :
Start and stop dribbling,
High and low dribbling,
Reverse dribbling,
Rolling dribbling.
Shooting :
Lay-up shot and its variations,
One hand set shot,
One hand jump shot,
Hook shot,
Free throw.
26
Rebounding:
Defensive rebound,
Offensive rebound,
Knock out,
Rebound organization.
Individual Defense:
Guarding the man without the ball,
Guarding the man with the ball.
Pivoting
Systems of play (defense & attack)
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Vaidhya, Rajesh “Skills & Tactics Basketball, (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Rose.H.Lee, “The Basketball Handbook.” (2004) Human kinetics, USA.
Boe, Clair and Norton, Kon,”Men to Men Defense and Attack.” (1959) New York: Ronald Press Company.
Boe, Clair and Norton, Kon, ”Zone Defense and Attack.” (1959)New York: Ronald Press Company.
Colberk, A.L.,” Modern Basketball – A Fundamental Analysis of Skills and Tacticts.”(1956) London.
Nicholas Kaya.
Moontasir, Abbas, “Principles of Basketball.” (1979)Bombay Skanda Publication.
Srivatsan s., ”Basketball.”NIS,Publication,Patiala.
27
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
WEIGHT TRAINING,WT. LIFTING, POWER LIFTING AND BEST PHYSIQUE
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Weight Lifting, Power Lifting and Best Physique including important tournaments and
distinguish personalities of national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the game/sport.
4. Differences among weight training, weight lifting and power lifting.
5. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
6. Safety principles of weight training and introduction of the muscular system of the body.
7. International rules and regulations of the game.
8. Importance of hygiene for a weightlifter.
9. Etiquette.
10. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Weight Training Exercises (Iso tonic, Iso-metric, Iso-kinetic, Plyo-metrics, Pulley and
Multiple Machine Exercises):-
Two arms curl; Front press;
Press behind the neck; Dead lift;
Quarter, half and full squats;
Rise on Toes (heel raising);
Straight arm pull over; Bent over; Rowing;
Bench press; Leg press; Wrist rolling;
Pronation and Supination; Trunk twisting;
Good morning exercise; Sit-ups with weight;
Alternate press; Spot running with weight;
Stepping on bench/stairs; Jack knife; lateral rise;
Iron shoes, Ankle weight, Wrist weight and Weight jacket exercises.
Exercises with wall bars,
Exercises with vaulting box,
Exercises with medicine ball,
Exercises with pulley, and
Exercises with multiple machines.
NOTE:-Students should be exposed to different sets of weight training exercises required in different
games and sports.
WEIGHT LIFTING :
Stages of two hand skills, two hands half and complete jerks from chest, and two hand snatch.
Two hands clean in half squat, in deep squat and in split squat.
Snatch with split style and squat style.
POWER LIFTING:
BEST PHYSIQUE:
Evaluation Plan
28
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Shanker, Ajay “Bodybuilding-A Beginner’ Approach.” (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Katyal, P.N.,” Manual of Weight Lifting.” Ambala Cantt. Green Printing Press.
Krikley, George W. Modern Weight lifting.” (1957)Load Faber Popular Books.
Krikley, George and Geodhody John.”The Manual of Weight training.”()1971 London Stanley Paul and
Company.
Murray,Jim and Karpovich Peter V.” Weight Training in Athletics.” (1965)Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Printice
Hall.
29
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
WRESTLING
Objectives:-
1. History Wrestling including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the game/sport.
4. Different kinds of wrestling.
5. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
6. International rules and regulations of the game.
7. Importance of hygiene for a wrestler.
8. Etiquette.
9. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Learning and demonstrating fundamental skills involving drills and lead up games related with the style of
wrestling:
Take downs: leg tackles and arm drag.
Counters for take downs: Cross face and whizzer series.
Escapes from under: Sit out-turns in tripped.
Counters for escapes from under: Basic control, back drop and counters for stand up.
Pinning combination: Nelson series( half Nelson, half nelson and bar arm) leg lift series, leg
cradle series, reverse double bar arm, chicken wing and half nelson.
Escapes from pinning: Wing lock series, double arm lock, roll and bridge.
Standing wrestling; Head under arm series and whizzer series.
Evaluation Plan: Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Clanger, E.L. & Dex Perry,”Wrestling.” A.S. Barus 7 Co. New York.
Dubey, C.H.,” A Wrestling Guide.” 201 Rampura, Saggar(M.P.)
U.S. Naval Institute,”Wrestling.”Arnapolis Manyala USA.
30
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
SWIMMING
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Swimming including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the sport.
4. Different kinds of Aquatics activities.
5. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
6. Glossary of terms used in swimming.
7. International rules and regulations of the game.
8. Safety and sanitary rules of Swimming pool.
9. Common water borne diseases, their causes and preventive measures.
10. Importance of hygiene for an athlete.
11. Etiquette.
12. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Entry into the swimming pool
Development of water balance and confidence:
Water- fear removing drills, Floating-mushroom and jelly-fish etc. and gliding with
and without kickboard.
Teaching of competitive swimming strokes (Free style, breast stroke, back stroke and butterfly etc.):
Body position, leg, kick, arm pull, breathing and co-ordination.
Starts and turns of the concerned strokes.
Individual medley; relays and relay tactics.
Water treading and simple jumping.
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Stud
Shrivastava, A.K. “Encyclopaedia of Sports” (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya
Ganj New Delhi.
Shrivastava, A.K. “How to Coach Swimming” (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road,
Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Counsilmen, James E.,” Science of Swimming.” London: Pelham Books.
Fair Banks and Annee Ross,” Teaching Spring Board Diving.” Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall Inc.N.J. 1963.
Gallagher Harry,” Swimming.” London: Pelham Books, 1970.
Harlen, Bruce,”How to Improve Your Diving.” Poona Modern Book Stall.
Helen Elkington,”Swimming: A HAND Book for Teacher.” Cambridge University Press.
Reckhan, George,”Diving Complete.” London: Faber and Faber Ltd.
31
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
BOXING
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15 Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Boxing including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national and
international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Different kinds of Boxing.
4. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
5. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
6. International rules and regulations of the game.
7. Importance of hygiene for a boxer.
8. Etiquette.
9. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS (Classification of Offensive and Defensive Actions):
Offensive Actions/Attacks: Direct and Counter Attacks.
Types of Punches(Six types of blows /punches):- Straight Left to the Face; Straight Right to the
Face; Straight Left to the Body; Straight Right to the Body; Left and Right Hooks; and
Left and Right Upper-cut.
Defense Actions (Two types):
Active defense.
Passive defense.
Four Groups of Defense (Blocking; Parries; Avading Movements; and Evading Movements):-
Blocking:-Head Block; Shoulder Block; Elbow block; and Double block.
Parries:- Left and right side parries; Inside parry; Outside parry; and Upward
Parry.
Avading Movements: Ducking; Weaving; and Slip left and right side.
Evading Movements: Step back; Sway back; Left side step; and Right side step.
Weak Points of the Boxer : Temporal, Centre of Moustache, Chin, Jugular vein, Flatting ribs,
Stomach.
Evaluation Plan :Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recomended
Shrivastava, A.K. “How to Coach Boxing” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road,
Darya Ganj New Delhi.
32
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
JUDO
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Judo including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national and
international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a judoka.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Rej (Saluation) :
Ritsurei (Saluation in standing postion).
Zarai (Saluation in sitting postion)
How to wear judo costume.
Kuma kata(Methods of holding judo costume.
Shisei(Posture in judo)
Kuzushi( Act of disturbing the opponent’s posture)
Tsukuriand kake(Preparatory action for attack)
Ukemi( Break fall ):
Urhiro Ukemi(Rear break fall).
Yoko Ukemi( Side break fall).
Mae Ukemi( Front break fall).
Mae Mawari Ukemi( Front rolling break fall).
Shin Tai(Advance or retreat of foot):
Suri-ashi (Gliding foot).
Tsugi-ashi (Following foot steps).
Ayumi-ashi (Drawing ankle throw).
Tai-Sabaki (Management of the body)
33
Nage-Waze (Throwing Technique):
Hiza Guruma (Knee-wheel).
Sesae Tsurikomi-ashi (Drawing ankle throw).
De-ashi Hari (Advance foot sweep).
O-goshi( Major Lion).
Seoi-nage (Shoulder throw).
Katama-waze (Grappling Technique):
Kesa-gatama (Scaff hold).
Kata Gatama( Shoulder hold).
Kami-shiho gatama (Locking of upper four quarters).
Methods of escaping from each hold.
Lead-up Games:
Break-fall relay(Maximum number of falls from standing position in one minute
duration).
Maximum number of shoulder throws in one minute.
Maximum number of obstacles jumped while doing Mae –mawri-ukemi relay
(Maximum number of falls in one minute duration).
Evaluation Plan ; (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Book Recomended
Kumar, Mukesh “Judo” (2006-07) Judo Federation of Asia
Aora, Monica “ Judo Coaching Manual (2005) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road,
Darya Ganj New Delhi.
34
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
Light Apparatus/ Calisthenics
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Indigenous Activities (Lezium, Lathies, Hoops, Malkham, Indian Clubs, Dumbles,
Drum, Different Formations – Pyramids, Bhartyam, Aerobics, etc. and its historical development with
special reference to India.
2. To prepare the students for demonstrations/displays on international, national or important days of
the institution.
3. Knowledge of equipment required for different indigenous activities.
4. To teach Free Hand Exercises emphasizing on physical fitness, rhythmic sense and neuromuscular
co-ordination.
5. To teach and provide organized physical education activities emphasizing on skill learning,
leadership, orderly behaviour and enjoyment.
6. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
7. To wear appropriate dresses.
8. Etiquette.
9. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS– With and without apparatus:
Commands (English and Hindi words that are commonly used in physical education)
Fall-in a single line, attention, stand- at- ease, stand easy, eyes right, eyes
front, (dressing), open and close order march, right turn, left turn about
turn and mark time.
Marching:-
Quick march and halt, wheeling (left /right), turning while marching and time mark,
marching with salute.
Free Hand Exercises (Exercises without Apparatus):-
Set of Exercises – Two Counts, Four Counts, Eight Counts, Sixteen Counts and
Reverse Count Exercises – These exercises may be carried out with or without
drum.
Apparatus Exercise (Dumbbell, Indian club – rigid and swing exercises, Wands, Hoops,
Lazium, Malkham, Lathies, etc.):-Set of exercises will be the same as of exercises
without apparatus/ free hand exercises.
Different Formations: - Initial Order Formation, Open Order Formation, Semi-circular
Formation, Plus Formation, Letter Formation, Sun Formation, Star Formation,
Pyramid Formation, Arrow Formation, India Word Formation, Olympic Ring
Formation, India Map Formation, India Flag Formation, etc.
Minor Games:-At least 50 minor games to be taught at the end of the Period for 10-12
minutes.
Evaluation Plan: ( Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
35
Books Recommended For Study
Datta,A.K.,and Mazumdar, I.,”Students Teaching in Physical Education.”2004, Janvani
Prakshan(P)Ltd.30/35, Gali No. 9, Vishwas Nagar, Shahdra, Delhi-110032.
Govt. of India Publication,” The Fitness Corps.”
”Hand Book of Physical Education.”(1995),Friends Publication(India),6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee
Nagar-Delhi.
36
TITLES OF THE SUBJECT FOR BACHELOR OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(B.P. Ed.) – FOUR YEAR PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMME
B.P. Ed. SECOND YEAR (THEORY) – PART- A (Annexure-B)
1. English- Communication Skills (Paper-VII)
2. Foundation of Physical Education (Paper-VIII)
3. Educational Methodology (Paper-IX).
4. Sports Psychology (Paper-X)
5. Recreation, Play, Camping and Leadership Training (Paper-XI).
6. Teaching Methodology in Physical Education (Paper-XII)
7. Physiology of Exercise (Paper-XIII).
Note:
1. The scheme of study of Part A, B, & C is given in Annexure-B, followed by syllabus of Part-A
(Theory)
2. Syllabus for Part-B (Activity-Skills & Prowess) and Part-C (Teaching Practice) are given in
Annexure-II at the end of the theory syllabus.
37
ANNEXURE – B
Bachelor of Physical Education (B.P. Ed.) – Four-Year Professional Programme
Scheme of Study
Part-A, B & C
B.P. Ed. — Second Year
Part-A (Theory)
Paper Title of the Subjects with Code Credit Marks Internal
Assessment
10%
Paper-VII English -Communication Skills(ECS) 1 90 10
Paper-VIII Foundations of Physical Education (FPE) 1 90 10
Paper-IX Educational Methodology (EM) 1 70+20*P 10
Paper-X Sports Psychology (SP) 1 70+20*P 10
Paper-XI Recreation, Play, Camping and
Leadership Training(RPCLT)
1 90 10
Paper-XII Teaching Methodology in Physical
Education (TMPE)
1 70+20*P 10
Paper-XIII Physiology of Exercise (PE) 1 70+20*P 10
*P-Stands for marks for practical component.
Part-B (Activity – Skills and Prowess)
Paper Title of the subject Credit Marks Internal
assessment
20%
Athletics Teaching of Fundamentals, Rules and
Regulations and Measurements of
Fields
1 80 20
Badminton -do- 1 60 15
Kho-kho -do- 1 60 15
Kabbaddi -do- 1 60 15
Table Tennis -do- 1 60 15
Volleyball -do- 1 60 15
Handball -do- 1 60 15
Softball -do- 1 60 15
Part-C (Teaching Practice)
Teaching
Lessons
Athletics, Games, Calisthenics and
Theory – 5 lessons in each area, i.e.
5x 4 = 20 lessons.
1 80 20
NOTE: 1. Teaching practice will also continue in B.P. Ed. –Third Year.
2. Each student is required to pass separately in theory, practical and respective
internal assessment.
3. Six hours per day will be devoted for theory and practice i.e. three hours for theory
and three hours for practice / practical work.
38
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : Second Year
Paper : VII
Time : 3 Hrs.
ENGLISH --
COMMUNICATIONS
SKILLS
(ECS)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90
Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Book Prescribed: Fluency in English, Unit I to Unit-IX (For stream A Course in English 1st
year) Department of English, University of Delhi published by Macmillan
India Ltd.
Section-A
Unit I Text 20 marks
Q. 1. One essay type question on Summary/Character/Theme (10 marks)
(one out of two with internal choice)
Q 2. Passage for Comprehension from text. (10 marks)
Unit II Language through Literature 20 marks
Q. 1. Short question-answers from Poetry. (8 marks)
Q. 2. Vocabulary/Synonyms/Antonyms/Idioms- (12 marks)
(Choice should be given) (from the Text)
Section-B
Unit III Business Communication 25 marks
(1) Short notes on e-mail/Tele-Conference/Fax/Telex/Body (3X4=12 marks)
Language/ Principles of Communication/Barriers to
Communication/ Grapevine (Any 3 out of 5)
(2) Tender notices, auction notices, public notice, memo (1X3=3 marks)
(one out of two with internal choice)
(3) Resume Writing/Job Application 10 mark
Unit IV Language-in-use 25 marks
A. (1) Correction of Sentences (5 marks)
(2) Transformation of Sentences (10 marks)
B. Precis-Writing (10 marks)
Note: The Units of the text-book should be taken up by the teacher in an exhaustive manner along
with all the exercises given at the end of each unit. The purpose is to teach language
39
(vocabulary syntax, grammatical concepts in an interactive manner) within a specific
context.)
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2ndYear
Paper : VIII
Time : 3 Hrs.
FOUNDATIONS OF
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(FPE)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 90
Minimum Pass Marks: 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will carry
two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II
• Definition of Terms: Physical Training, Physical Culture, Physical Education, Teaching and Coaching. Meaning
and Scope of Education and Physical Education.
o Aims and Objectives of Physical Education and its contribution to Education.
o Objectives of physical education at different levels of Education:
(i) Elementary Education.
(ii) Primary Education.
(iii) Secondary Education and
(iv) Higher Education
o Physical Education – is an Art and Science.
Unit –III
• Philosophical Principles: Philosophy, its meaning and nature; Educational Philosophies (naturalism, Idealism,
Pragmatism, Realism, Existentialism) and their application to physical education.
• Sociological Principles: Physical Education and their influence on society; Physical activities (Games and
Sports) as man’s cultural heritage.
• Physical Education as a factor in socialization of individuals and groups and its role in national integration.
• Role of Physical Education in context to social problems – unemployment, youth unrest and health related
problems.
• Introduction to social stratification and sports.
Unit-IV
• Biological Principles: Evolution of man; biped position, its advantages and disadvantages, activities as the
physical basis of life;
• Individual difference. Heredity and environment, sex differences, body types, implication of individual
differences in physical education.
• Growth and development. Principles governing physical and motor growth and development.
Chronological, anatomical, physiological and mental age in individuals, their role in developing and implementing
programmed of physical education.
40
Unit- V
• Psychological Principles: Theories of learning – traditional and modern; the learning process – laws of learning,
(primary, associates and concomitant) Factors and conditions which promote learning; individual differences and
learning; maturation and learning.
• Transfer of training and learning curve.
• Play, brief description of theories of play.
Books Recommended
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Gupta, A.K. and Narang, Priyanka “Facts and Foundation in Physical Education” (2006-07) Sports
Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Vaidhya, Rajesh “Principles of Physical Education” (2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Sharma, Sita Ram “Sociological Foundation in Physical Education and Sports”(2004) Friends
Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi.
• Bucher A Charles and Wuest Deborah A , “Foundation of Physical Education and Sports” (1998) 10th
edition St. Louis Times Mirror, Mosby College Publishing.
41
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2nd Year
Paper : IX
Time : 3 Hrs.
EDUCATIONAL
METHODOLOGY
(EM)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
UNIT-I TEACHING METHODS
• Concept of Teaching and learning. Maxims of Teaching.
• Methods of Teaching: Lecture Method, Demonstration Method, Discussion Method, Orientation Method,
Assignment Method, Problem Solving Method, Remedial Teaching Method, Project Method, Kindergarten
Method (Story telling method and action song method).
UNIT-III LESSONS, TEACHING AIDS AND STEPS FOR EFFECTIVE TEACHING
• Types of lessons: knowledge lesson and appreciation lesson.
• Teaching aids and their importance in teaching: Audio-Visual aids, charts, models, films, boards (Simple, graphic
and magnetic boards).
• Steps of Effective Teaching: Personal Preparation, Technical Preparation, Organising Subject Matter and
Presentation of subject matter.
UNIT-IV EDUCATIONAL TECHNOLOGY AND EVALUATION
• Meaning, Definitions, need and importance of Educational Technology for a teacher.
• Latest Technologies for the teachers: Telematics, Multimedia, Television and overhead projector.
• Evaluation Procedure: Old Concept and New Approach.
• Types of Examination. Unit Test, Terminal Tests, Achievement Test, Diagnostic Tests and Aptitude Test.
• Other tools of Evaluation: Rating Scales, Interview and check list.
UNIT-V PHASES AND LEVELS OF TEACHING
• Phases of teaching: Pre-active phase, interactive phase and post active phase and their operation or function.
• Levels of teaching: Memory level, understanding level and reflective level: relationship between learning and
teaching with regard to class climate, types of learning, levels of learning.
• Micro teaching: its concepts, phases, application, merits and demerits.
Practical Part
42
Practical experience to use overhead projector, multimedia, television, handy-cam etc. shall be provided
in the teaching technology lab of the institution.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Vaidhya, Rajesh and Ramakrishnan, K.S. “Lesson Planning in Education and Physical Education”
(2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Anil and Daljinder , “Methods in Physical Education” (2005) Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower,
Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi.
• Dutta, A.K. and Magumder, Indu “Students Teaching in Physical Education” (2004) Janvani
Prakashan Pvt. Ltd. 30/35, Gali No. 9, Vishwas Nagar, Shahdra, Delhi-110032
• Sandhu, Kiran “Professional Preparation and career development in Physical Education and
Sports”(2004) Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi.
• Gupta, A.K. “Research Methodology in Physical Education” (2003) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B
EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
43
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2nd Year
Paper : X
Time : 3 Hrs.
SPORTS PSYCHOLOGY
(SP)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
• Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II
• Meaning and definitions of sports psychology.
• Origin and development of sports psychology.
• Need of sports psychology in physical education and sports.
• Competition, sports competition, its merits and demerits.
• Psychological factors affecting sports performance – stress, anxiety, tension, fear, and aggression;
and their management.
Unit-III
• Meaning, definition and nature of motor skill learning.
• Principles / conditions of motor skill learning.
• Learning curve, its types, characteristics; Plateau in learning curve, its reasons and solutions; and the
implications of learning curve in physical education and sports.
Unit-IV
• Meaning and definition of motivation, motives, drives and needs.
• Types of motivation.
• Conditions and factors for sports motivation.
• Method of motivation.
• Importance of motivation in the field of physical education and sports.
Unit – V
• Meaning, concept and definition of personality.
• Characteristics and dimensions of personality.
• Personality traits and its classification.
• Factors affecting the development of personality.
• Athletic / Sports performance and personality.
• Attention: Definition, nature, characteristics, types, and role of attention in physical education and sport.
Strategies for improving attention.
• Interest: Meaning, definition, types, ways and means of arousing and sustaining student’s interests in physical
education and sports.
Practical Part:
The students will be exposed to the following tests to provide practical knowledge:
44
(a) Sports Competitive Anxiety Test (SCAT)
(B) Reaction Time Test (RTT)-Visual and Auditory
BOOKS RECOMMENDED :
• Cratty, B.J (1989). “Psychology in contemporary sports”. Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.
• Kamlesh, M.L., (1998). “Psychology in Physical Education and Sports”. Metropolitan Book
Co., New Delhi.
• Punj, A.T. (1980). “Sports Psychology”, NIS, Patiala.
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Sahani, Sanjeev P. “Psychology and its application in Sports” (2005)1st edition – D.V.S. Publication
• Kamlesh M.L. “Psychology in Physical Education and Sports” – 4th edition Metropolitian Book Co.
New Delhi-2002
• Ward, Jame “Psychology applied to education” (2001) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
45
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2nd Year
Paper : XI
Time : 3 Hrs.
RECREATION, PLAY,
CAMPING AND
LEADERSHIP TRAINING
(RPCLT)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90
Minimum Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
• Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit: II Introduction to Recreation:
• Meaning, definition, scope and characteristics of recreation.
• Importance /significance of recreation.
• Aim, objective and scope of recreation.
• Types of recreation.
• Need and importance of recreation.
• Philosophy and principles of recreation.
Unit: III Programmes in Recreation.
• Criteria and Principles of selecting Programmes.
• Classification of recreation
• Indoor and outdoor activities.
• Water activities.
• Cultural activities.
• Literary activities.
• Nature and outing.
• Social events.
• Adventure activities.
Influence of Recreation in Social Institution
• Family.
• Educational Institutions.
• Community Centres.
• Religious Organizations.
• Factors/changes in the society responsible for affecting the need for recreation.
Unit: IV Play
• Meaning and definition of play.
• Aim, objective and significance of play.
• Various theories of play.
46
• The significance of study of theories of play for the teacher of PhysicalEducation.
Camping
• Meaning, aim and objective of the camp.
• Scope of camping.
• Need and importance of the camp.
• Types of camp.
• Uses of camping/outdoor activities.
• Organization and administration of camping.
• Selection and layout of the camp site.
• Camping leadership and supervision.
• Camp programme.
• Agencies promoting camp.
• Evaluation of camp.
• Educational values of camp.
Unit: V Leadership Training
• Meaning and definition of a leader and leadership.
• Nature and characteristics of leader.
• Types of leaders.
• Brief history of leadership training in physical education.
• Qualification and qualities of leader.
• Need and importance of leadership in physical education.
Books Recommended :
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Thour, Mandeep “Camping Management in Physical Education”(2006) Friends Publication, 6,
Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi.
• Jain, Deepak “Physical Education and Recreational Activities”(2002) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New
Delhi.
• Dutta, A.K. “Games and Sports for Children” (2004)1st edition - Janvani Prakashan Pvt. Ltd. 30/35,
Gali No. 9, Vishwas Nagar, Shahdra, Delhi-110032
47
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2nd Year
Paper : XII
Time : 3 Hrs.
TEACHING
METHODOLOGY IN
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(TMPE)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
• Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II
• Meaning and scope of methods, factors influencing methods of teaching formal and informal methods of
teaching, learning process and conditions of learning.
• Classification of pupils in Physical Education and its importance.
• Methods of Classification of Pupils.
• Age and Gender Characteristics – physical and psychological, mental and cognitive and social characteristics
during infancy or babyhood, early childhood, later childhood and adolescence.
Unit-III
• Principles of teaching: (simple to complex, part to whole, learning by doing, intrinsic and extrinsic motivation,
frequency and duration of instructions, recognition, methods of teaching physical activities, individual and group
teaching, capacity of learner.
• Teaching of Activities:
(i) Athletics.
(ii) Callisthenic’s
(iii) Major Games
(iv) Minor Games.
(v) Rhythmic Activities.
(vi) Light Apparatus.
(vii) Marching.
Unit-IV
• Presentation technique (Planning, Presentation, Organisation, Supervision and Evaluation).
o Steps in teaching motor skills.
o Commands and their importance.
o Types of class formation in teaching and learning process.
o Class management.
• Lesson Plan: importance and objectives, various aspects of lesson plan; teaching and coaching lesson plans
(games, sports, calisthenics and theory) in physical education, evaluation of general and specific lesson plans.
• Marking of Tracks and other Fields: Football, Hockey, Basketball, Badminton, Lawn-tennis, Handball, Kabaddi,
Kho-Kho, Cricket, Softball and Volleyball.
Unit – V
48
• Marking of 400 mtr and 200 mtr tracks and other fields – Football, Handball, Hockey, Kabaddi, Kho-kho, Cricket,
Basketball and Softball.
• Intramural and Extramural: Meaning, need, importance and their organisation.
• Tournaments / competitions: meaning, need, importance and types of tournaments (Knock-out, league,
combination and challenge).
• Athletic Meet, Camping, Picnic, Sports meet: Meaning, aim, objectives, advantages, types and organisation.
Practical Part:
(a) Marking of tracks and other fields (Mentioned in the Unit-III), on charts/thermo coal/ wooden
board or other material and then transferring them to the actual ground. For this purpose the
students shall be given conversion of measurement units, i.e. from metres to centimeters.
(b) Project work of conducting and organizing of Intramurals, Practice Matches and Athletic Meet.
Books Recommended
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Kutty, Suresh “Research Methods in Physical Education” (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B
EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• D.R. Sharma and et. al, “Learning Callisthenic in Physical Education”(2005) - Friends Publication, 6,
Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Sandhu, Kiran “Professional Preparation and career development in Physical Education and
Sports”(2004) Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Sherril, Claudine “Adaptive Physical Activity, Recreational and Sports” (1998) 5th edition -
McGraw Hill Publisher Ltd.
• Bucher Charles A . and Wuest Deborah A , “Foundation of Physical Education and Sports” (1989)
10th edition St. Louis Times Mirror, Mosby College Publishing .
49
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2nd Year
Paper : XIII
Time : 3 Hrs.
PHYSIOLOGY OF
EXERCISE
(PE)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will carry
two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II
• Definition of physiology and exercise physiology.
• Importance and role of exercise physiology in the field of Physical Education and sports.
• Effects of physical training on respiratory, cardiac and muscular systems.
Unit- III
• Structure: The basis for contraction – sliding filament theory.
• Function of skeleton muscle: The motor unit.
• Different kinds of Motor Units (fast twitch and slow twitch fibers).
• The execratory system, its structure and functions
• Brief introduction of reproductive system; process of reproduction in human being. The function of male and
female reproductive system.
Unit-IV
• Circulatory System.
• Stroke volume, cardiac output, pulse rate.
• Effect of training on functioning of heart.
• Changes in blood cells during exercise.
• Blood pressure changes during exercise.
• Measurement of blood pressure and effect of exercise on systolic and diastolic blood pressure.
Unit-V
• Respiratory System: Its functions and mechanism.
• Vital capacity, tidal volume, residual volume, inspiration and expired air pressure.
• Transportation of gases: at lungs level and cellular level.
• Changes during exercise in respiratory system.
Practical part
* Measurement of Vital Capacity (VC) and learning of operation of Spiro meter
(Wet/Dry).
50
* Measurement of Cardio-respiratory Endurance (CRE) through Cooper’s 9 /12Min. Run /Walk Test and
Harvard Step Test etc.
Books Recommended:
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Khanna G.L. and Goswami, A. “Exercise Physiology”(2007) - Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Tiwari, Sandhya “Exercise Physiology”,(2006) 2nd edition - Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Jonathan K. Ehrman and et al, “Clinical Exercise Physiology” (2003)- Human Kinetic Publisher inc.
USA.
• Williams D. McARDLE and et al, “Exercise Physiology”, (1996) 4th edition – Human Kinetic
Publisher inc. USA.
• Vaidya Ratan, “Hnddbook of Human Physiology” (1993) Jaypee Brothers.
51
ANNEXURE-II (Pages )
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
SYLLABUS OF ACTIVITY – SKILL & PROWESS AND TEACHING PRACTICE
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
ATHLETICS (Track and Field) for Men and Women
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of the event and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the events.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of each event.
6. Importance of hygiene for an athlete.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Track Events
Relays: 4x100m and 4x400m
(a) Baton Exchange Techniques: - Visual &Non Visual
(b) Baton Exchange zones
(c) Equipment Required
(d) Fixing up runners for different relay races.
(e) Rules &Regulations for Competition
Field Events
Shot- Put
(a) Techniques-: Perry O’Brien and Disco-Put.
(b) Teaching Stages: Hand hold, Placement of shot, Initial stance, T-position,
Glide, Delivery stance, Delivery action and follow through/reverse
(c) Rules and Regulations for Competition
Discuss Throw
(a) Teaching Stages: Hand hold, Initial stance ,Preliminary swings, Turn,
Delivery Stance, Delivery action and Reverse
(b) Rules &Regulations for Competition
High Jump
(a) Techniques: - Straddle Roll and Fosbury Flop Techniques
(b) Teaching Stages Approach run, Take off, Flying phase, bar clearance and
landing.
(c) Rule and Regulations for competition.
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
52
Note: The Fosbury Flop technique shall be taught, if proper facilities are available.
Books Recommended For Study
1. Singh, Baljeet “Athletic Conditioning” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
2. Bosen,Ken O.,”Track and Field Fundamental Techniques”, Patiala:N.I.S. Publication.
3. Dyson, Geoffrey HG, Edumndson, Joseph, “Athletics for Schools.” (1969)University of London Press
Ltd..
4. Doherty, J. Mannet, “Track&Field” Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice Hall Inc.
5. Dyoon, Geoffrey, G.H. The Mechanic of Athletics (1962) London University of London press Ltd.,
6. Hodks, Gens.Application off Weight Tranning to Athletics.( 1962) Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice
Hall Inc.,
7. Malhotra, Ashok Kumar A Guide to be an Athlete, Krishna Publication Books New Delhi.
Mohan, V.M. Athletics for biggners, Metropolitan Books New Delhi.
53
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
BADMINTON
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Badminton including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard require for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a badminton player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Grips:-
Racket and shuttle grips.
Foot Work:-
The stance, pivot, forehand return and back court return.
Serves:-
Short and long serves.
Strokes:-
Fore hand stroke, Back hand stroke, Over head stroke and Net stroke.
Smash:-
Fore hand and back hand smash.
The Drop:
Types of Games:-
Singles, doubles and mixed doubles.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan:Equal distribution)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignment.
Books Recommended For Study
Thani, L “ Skill and Tactics Badminton (1998) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Jain, Anu “ Badminton Coaching Manual (2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Davis Pat, “Guiness Book of Badminton.”( 1983.) Pat Devis & Guiness Superlatives Limited
Downey Jake, “Better Badminton for All.” (1982)Pelham Books Limited.
Davic Part,”Better Badminton Learn in Yourself Book.”(1979),Orient Paper Books, London.
Doway, J.C.,”Better Badminton for All.”(1969), Pelham Books Ltd. Great Britain.
Pelton,Berry C,”Badminton.”(1971),N,J,Printice Hall Inc.Englewood Cliffs.
54
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
KHO-KHO
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Kho-Kho including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a kho-kho player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS - General Skills:-Running between poles, chasing, dodging, faking etc.
Skills in Chasing:-
Correct kho, moving on the lanes, pursuing the runner, trapping the inactive runner,
trapping the runner on heels, trapping on the poles, diving, judgment in giving kho, and
rectification of foul.
Skills in Running:-
Zigzag running, single and double chain, ring play, rolling in the sides, dodging while facing and on
the back fakes, on the pole fake-legs, body, arms etc., combination of different skills.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan:( Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
“Kho-Kho the Game of Chase and Trill.” Kho-Kho Association, Maharashtra, Bombay.
Yogesh Yadav,” Kho-Kho.” (1969), Maharashtra Kho-Kho Association, Bombay.
55
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
KABADDI
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Kabaddi including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of
national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a kabaddi player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
The Cant: Kabaddi, Kabaddi, Kabaddi - -
Skills in Raiding:-
Touching with hand, toe touch, various kicks- side kick, front kick, curve kick, cross kick, roll
kick, mule kick or back kick, fly kick etc; crossing the baulk line, crossing the bonus line, luring the
opponent to catch and pursuing.
Skills of Catching (holding) the Raider:-
Different chain formations, catching of particular part of the body- ankle catch, double ankle catch,
knee catch, double knee catch, thigh catch, double thigh catch wrist catch, crocodile catch, shoulder catch,
washer man hold etc., jump and dive catch, luring the raider to take particular position so as to facilitate
catching.
Additional Skills Raiding and Catching:-
Bringing the opponents into particular position, escaping from various holds, techniques
of escaping from chain formation, combined formations in offence and defense.
Positional and systems of play:
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan : (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Rao, C.V.,”Kabaddi.”(1971), NIS. Publications, Patiala.
Reddy, B.A.,”Scientific Kabaddi.”(1974), Raman’s Printing Press,Madras.
56
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
TABLE TENNIS
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Table Tennis including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of
national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a Table Tennis player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Stance and foot work:
Body position, foot placement and movements.
The Grip:-
The Tennis Grip: Forehand grip and back hand grip.
The Pen holder grip.
Serves:-
Fore hand serve (Forward and backward spin serves).
Back hand serve (Forward and backward spin serves).
Side spin serve.
High toss serve.
Strokes :-( From both hands- forehand and back hand)
Push, chop, drive (with top spin), half volley, smash, drop-shot, ballon, flick shit and long force.
Game Tactics:-
Defensive and attacking in singles, doubles and mixed doubles.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan; (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Chaudhary, P “ Table Tennis Coaching Manual” (2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Earna Victor,” Your Book of Table Tennis.” (1971), Faber and Faber Ltd. 3, Queen Square, London.
Myers Harold,” Table Tennis.”(1977), Faber and Faber Ltd. 3, Queen Square, London.
Sklorz Martin,” Sport Table Tennis.”(1973),E,P, Ltd. Cast Ardsley, Wakefield, Yorkshire.
Varner, Margaret and Harrison J.R. Brown, “Physical Education, Activities Series, Table Tennis.” WM. C.
Brown Company Dubuque, IOWA.
57
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
VOLLEYBALL
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Volleyball including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a volleyball player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Player’s Stance-while receiving and passing the ball.
Passes (overhead and underhand):-
The volley (overhead pass) and the dig (underhand pass).
Serves:-
Under arm serve, side arm serve, tennis serve, Round arm serve, float serve and smash serve.
Spike/ Smash:-
Straight arm spike and round arm spikes.
Blocks:-
Single block.
ADVANCE SKILLS
Pass:-
Back pass, Back roll volley, Back roll dig, Side roll dig and Jump and pass.
Serve:-
Side arm floater and overhead floating serve.
Spike:-
Spiking cross the court and spiking down the court.
Block:-
Double block and triple block.
Dive:-
Dive combined with dig (One handed) and dive combined with dig (Two handed).
Systems of Play:-
5 – 1 and 4 -2 systems of play with rotation of serve.
NOTE:- Advance skills may be taught during the specialization in the fourth year of B.P.Ed.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
58
Books Recommended For Study
Kus Sally, “Coaching Volleyball Successfully.” Human Kinetics P.O. Box 5076 Champaign, IL61825-5076
Arora, Monica “ Volleyball Coaching Manual” (2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Anthony, Don.”Success in Volleyball.” (1978), John Murray Publishers Ltd. London.
Nicholls, Keith.” Modern Volleyball for Teachers, Coaches and Players.”(1970), Lepus Books, London.
Sandhu, G.S.” Volleyba[[:Basic and Advanced.” The Sports People, Chandigarh.
Sandefur Kandy.” Volleyball.” (1970), Goodyear Publishing Company, Inc. California.
Siyamaker, Thomas and Brown, Virgine H.”Power Volleyball.” (1976), Sounders Company, London.
Sotir, Nicholas.” Winning Volleyball.”(1975), Stanley Paul, London.
59
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
HANDBALL
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Handball including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a handball player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Basic stance, hand and feet movements.
Running and Catching the Ball:-
Running and catching the ball with two hands, Catching at chest height, Catching the high ball
and catching the low ball.
Passing and Throwing the Ball:-
One hand shoulder pass, two hand chest pass and the long throw.
Dribbling (Running with the Ball)
Shooting:-
The standing throw, the sides throw, the jump shot, the reverse shot, the fall shot, and the goal
keeping.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
O.P. Sharma, “Handball Rule Book.” (2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road,
Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Mand, Charles L. “Handball Fundamentals.” (1968), Cinio, Charles E. Merrill Company, Columbus.
Philips, B.E.”Handball its Play and Management”(1957), The Ronald Press, New York.
Robarson,Richard and Olson Herbert.” Beginning Handball.”(1969), Wadsworth Company, Inc. Belmont.
Rowland B.J.”Handball: A Complete Guide.”(1970), Faber and Faber Ltd. 24 RussellA Square, London.
60
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
SOFTBALL
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Softball including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of
national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a Softball player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Batting:-
The grip: Short, long and standard.
The stance: Parallel, open and closed.
Swing and hitting.
Bunting.
Pitching:-
The grip: Three and four finger.
Windmill and figure of eight.
Base Running:-
Running to first base.
Running more than one base.
Base stealing.
Fielding:-
Fielding ground balls.
Fielding fly balls.
Game Tactics:-
Batting strategy.
Fielding strategy.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
61
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-C( TEACHING PRACTICE)
TEACHING PRACTICE
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. Importance of teaching practice in physical education.
2. To develop efficiency in the conduct and teaching of physical activities of formal nature.
3. To prepare the student-teacher to face the students in theory as well as activity classes.
4. To teach Free Hand Exercises emphasizing on physical fitness, rhythmic sense and neuromuscular
co-ordination.
5. To teach and provide organized physical education activities emphasizing on skill learning,
leadership, orderly behaviour and enjoyment.
6. To develop the skill of teaching of students of different age groups of different gender.
7. To prepare the students to handle the class of different durations.
8. To prepare the student-teacher to handle the class effectively and efficiently during the
university examination in the presence of the internal examination board.
Review of the syllabus taught in B.P.ED.-FIRST YEAR under Light apparatus /Calisthenics activity
FORMAL LESSONS (Five lessons in each area –Athletics, games, calisthenics and theory)
Note:-B.P.Ed.- first year students will be engaged to conduct five lessons in each area mentioned above.
Proper lesson plan shall be prepared by each student- teacher. The lessons will be supervised by the faculty
members, who would discuss the merits and demerits of the concerned lesson and guide the student-teacher
for the future. Each lesson should be completed as per the plan mentioned in the lesson plan.
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Datta,A.K.,and Mazumdar, I.,”Students Teaching in Physical Education.”2004, Janvani
Prakshan(P)Ltd.30/35, Gali No. 9, Vishwas Nagar, Shahdra, Delhi-110032.
Govt. of India Publication,” The Fitness Corps.”
“Hand Book of Physical Education.”(1995),Friends Publication(India),6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee
Nagar-Delhi.
62
TITLES OF THE SUBJECTS FOR BACHELOR OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(B.P. Ed.) – FOUR YEAR PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMME
B.P. Ed. THIRD YEAR (THEORY) – PART -A (Annexure-C)
1. English-Communication Skills (Paper-XIV)
2. Kinesiology and Bio-Mechanics (paper-XV)
3. Sports Management (Paper-XVI)
4. Measurement and Evaluation (Paper-XVII).
5. Applied Computer Education & Statistics in Physical Education (Paper-XVIII).
6. Health Education (Paper-XIX).
7. Sociology of Sports (Paper-XX).
Note:
1. Scheme of study of Part-A, B & C is given in Annexure-C, followed by Syllabus of Part-A
(Theory)
2. Syllabus for Part-B (Activity Skill and Prowess) and Part-C (Teaching Practice) are given in
Annexure-III at the end of the theory syllabus.
63
ANNEXURE – C
Bachelor of Physical Education (B.P. Ed.) – Four-Year Professional Programme
Scheme of Study
Part-A, B & C
B.P. Ed. — Third Year
Part-A (Theory)
Paper Title of the Subjects with Code Credit Marks Internal
Assessment
10%
Paper-XIV English -Communication Skills(ECS) 1 90 10
Paper-XV Kinesiology and Bio-mechanics(KBM) 1 70+20*P 10
Paper-XVI Sports Management (SM) 1 90 10
Paper-XVII Measurement and Evaluation(ME) 1 70+20*P 10
Paper-XVIII Applied Computer Education and
Statistics in Physical Education(ACESPE)
1 70+20*P 10
Paper-XIX Health Education (HE) 1 90 10
Paper-XX Sociology of Sports (SS) 1 90 10
*P- Stands for marks for practical component.
Part-B (Activity – Skills and Prowess)
Paper Contents of Games and Sports Credit Marks Internal
Assessment
20%
Athletics Teaching of Fundamentals, Rules and
Regulations and Measurements of
Fields
1 80 20
Tennis -do- 1 60 15
Yoga -do- 1 60 15
Hockey -do- 1 60 15
Cricket -do- 1 60 15
NOTE: To give more time to teaching practice in the schools lesser number of games has been
given in third year.
Part-C (Teaching Practice)
One theory, one game,
one athletic, one
calisthenics lesson shall
be opted by the students
for annual university
examination.
Ten supervised lessons for each
activity i.e. class room teaching,
game lesson, athletic lesson and
calisthenics lesson. 10x4= 40 lessons
2 160 40
NOTE: 1. Each lesson will be of 50 marks including internal assessment. There will be External Examination.
2. Each student is required to pass separately in theory, practical and respective assessment.
3. Six hours per day will be devoted for theory and practice i.e. three hours for theory and three
hours for practice / practical work.
64
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XIV
Time : 3 Hrs.
ENGLISH --
COMMUNICATIONS SKILLS
(ECS)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90
Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Book Prescribed: Fluency in English- Unit 10 to 18 (prescribed by University of Delhi for
B.A. Programme Stream A Course in English 1st year) Macmillan India
Ltd.
Section-A
Unit I Text 20 marks
Q. 1. One essay type question on Summary/Character/Theme
(one out of two with internal choice) (10 marks)
Q 2. Passage for Comprehension from text. (10 marks)
Unit II Language through Literature 20 marks
Q. 1. (i) Central Idea/Summary of poem. (5 marks)
(ii) Explanation of a stanza with reference to the context. (5marks)
Q. 2. Vocabulary/Synonyms/Antonyms/Idioms (from the text) (10 marks)
Section-B
Unit III Communication Skills 30 marks
Q 1. (i) Welcome Address, Thank-You notes. (10 marks)
(ii) Report Writing ( of functions in particular) (10 marks)
OR
(iii) Minutes of a meeting, agenda, notice of meeting.
Q 2. Request Letters, Good News and Bad News Letters, Persuasive (10 marks)
Letters; Sales Letters, Letter to Editor
Unit IV Language-in-use 20marks
Q 1. Transformation of Sentences, One-word substitution (all types) (10 marks)
(5+5 marks)
Q 2. Translation of a passage from M.I.L. into English. (10 marks)
OR
Précis- Writing
65
Note: The Units of the text-book should be taken up by the teacher in an exhaustive manner
alongwith all the exercises given at the end of each unit. The purpose is to teach language
(vocabulary syntax, grammatical concepts in an interactive manner) within a specific context.
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XV
Time : 3 Hrs.
KINESIOLOGY AND
BIOMECHANICS
(KBM)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 70
Minmum Pass Marks: 28
Practical Marks ; 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit-I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First
question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II
Kinesiology: Introduction, Meaning and Definitions.
• Importance of Kinesiology for games and sports.
• Anatomical Position and movement of joints
• Planes and axis.
• Muscular skeletal system-origin and insertion of muscles.
• Types of Muscular Contraction.
• Different roles of muscles in a total movement.
Unit-III
• Structure and movements of the following joints:
Neck, shoulder girdle, shoulder joint, elbow, trunk, hip, knee, ankle and foot.
Unit-IV
• Meaning and Scope of biomechanics in physical education.
• Meaning of linear kinematics and their application in sports.
• Meaning of linear kinetics and their application in sports.
• Meaning of the terms: Centre of gravity, equilibrium, stability, levers, centripetal and centrifugal forces
and their application in sports.
Unit- V
• Muscular analysis of fundamental skills: Walking, running, jumping, and throwing.
Practical Part
• Demonstration of fundamental movements of major joints of upper and lower extremities.
• Demonstration of fundamental movements with reference to various axes and planes.
Books Recommended
66
• Goswami, Jogiswar “Basic Kinesiology” (2007) 1st edition - Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower,
Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Abernethy, Bruce and et al, “The Biophysical Foundation of Human Movement”(2005) 2nd edition -
Human Kinetic Publisher inc. USA.
• D. Gordon .F and et al, “Research Methods in Biomechanics” (2004) Nancy Elgin Publication.
67
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XVI
Time : 3 Hrs.
SPORTS MANAGEMENT
(SM)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 90
Minimum Pass Marks: 36
Internal Assessment: 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
UNIT-1
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
UNIT-1I FUNDAMENTALS OF MANAGEMENT
---- Management in Physical Education and Sports: Concept, meaning and definition; need and scope of management; and
scope of management in sports.
---- Theories of Management: The classical theory, the Neo-classical theory and Modern Theory
---- Types of Management: Authoritarian management, Laissez-faire Management and Democratic Management.
---- Functions of Management: Planning, Organising, Staffing, Directing, Co-ordaining, Budgeting, Controlling and
evaluating.
---- Management Skills: Technical skills, Human Skills, and Conceptual Skills.
---- Managerial and its Roles: Interpersonal Roles, Informational Roles, Decision Making Roles.
---- Qualities and Qualifications of a Manager: Personal Qualities, Leadership Qualities; and Academic and Professional
Qualities.
UNIT-11I MANAGEMENT AND TECHNIQUES
---- Personnel Management: Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Principles of personnel Management; Aspects of personnel
management, Job Analysis, Description and specification.
---- Management Procedure: Introduction, Techniques of framing procedures, Policies and procedures pertaining to physical
education and sports.
---- Meetings: Meaning, characteristics and types of meetings, effective procedures of handling of meetings.
---- Office Management: Meaning, Nature (Centralized and Decentralized) and functions of office management, Aspects of
office management.
---- Financial Management: Introduction, objective and scope of financial management, Purpose and Principles of Financial
Management in physical education and sports.
---- The Budget: Meaning, Definition and objective of the budget, Principles of Planning the Budget, Preparation of budget.
---- Public Relations: Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Purpose need and Importance and Principles of Public relations in
physical education and sports. Planning and organizing the public relations programme. Public relations Media (Direct and
Indirect), Suggestion and evaluation for improving the public relation programme.
68
UNIT-IV
ORGANISTION AND ADMINISTRATION
---- Meaning and Definitions: Introduction, Meaning of Organization, Administration, Management and Planning;
Need and importance of Organization and Administration in Physical Education and Sports; Need of
Administrative Policies, Guiding Policies of a good Administrator(Function on the Basis of Facts, Be Just to his
Staff, Students, Public, Opponents & Competitors, and Educational System).
---- Intramurals and Extramural
Introduction and Meaning of Intramural and Extramural Programmes and their Objectives. Organization and
Administrative Set-up of Intramural and Extramural Programmes. Policies and Practices for Organization and
Management of Intramurals and Extramural.
----- Instructional Programme: Introduction, Meaning, Design and Management of the Instructional Programme,
Factors to be Considered in Making the Instructional Programme Effective(Time Table, Class Size, Time
Allotment, Teaching Area/Station, Students Grouping, Faculty Utilization, Special Instructional Methods and
Marking (Grading) of Students).
---- Curriculum Development and Management: Introduction, Meaning, Definitions, Nature, Objectives and
Goals of Curriculum. Framework or Scope of Curriculum, Principles of Curriculum Development, Steps in
Curriculum Planning, Curriculum Trends and Patterns, Selection and Sequence of Contents (Curriculum).
UNIT-V
MANAGEMENT OF SPORTS FACILITIES, EQUIPMENT, SUPERVISION AND EVALUATION
---- Management of Facilities: Introduction, Administrative and General Principles of Planning Facilities, Types of
Facilities, Facility Requirements, Construction and Management of Sports Infrastructures, Indoor Facilities-
Gymnasium and Swimming pool.
---- Management of Equipment and Material: Introduction, Meanings of Equipment and Material, Need and
Importance, Types, Procurement and Principles of Procurement of Equipment.
Principles of Purchase of Equipment. Purchase Procedure, Important Considerations in Selecting Sports
Equipment, Receiving—Stocktaking and Storing Equipment, Care and Maintenance & Conservation of
Equipment, Improvisation and Modernization of Equipment, and Disposal of Equipment.
---- Supervision: Introduction, Meaning, Definitions, Aim and Objectives, Nature and Scope, Principles and
Techniques, Need and Importance and Guidelines for Effective Supervision in Physical Education and Sports.
---- Evaluation: Introduction, Concept, Meaning, Definition, Nature, Purpose, Need and Importance of Evaluation
for a Teacher and Administrator of Physical Education and Sports. Important Pints, Steps and Guidelines for an
Effective Evaluation Programme.
---- Managerial and Administrative Duties: Instructional, Office, Finance, Facilities, Public Relations,
Personnel, Professional, Purchases, Intra-murals, Extra-murals etc Duties- of Teacher of Physical
Education/Director Sports/A Coach.
REFERNCE BOOKS:
----Dheer, S and Radhika Kamal,”Organisation and Administration of Physical Education”.(1991),
Friends Publications,6 Mukherjee Tower, Mukherjee Nagar, Com. Complex, Near Batra
Cinema,Delhi- 1100009.
--- Kamlesh, M.L. “Management Concepts in Physical “. (2000), Meteropolitan Books Co. Private LTD.,1,
Netaji Subhash Marg, New Delhi-1100002.
--- Jenson, Clayne R.”Administraive Management of Physical Education and Athletic Programs”.(1983), Lea
& Febiger,600 washington Square,Philadelphia, PA 19106,USA.
--- Roy, Sudhanshu Shekhar,”Sports Management”.(1995) Friends Publications, 6, Mukherjee Tower,
Mukherjee Nagar, Com. Complex, Near BATRA Cinema, New Delhi-1100009.
--- Thomas, J.P.”Organisation of Physical Education”.(1972), Gnanodaya Press,11,Anderson Street, Madras-1.
69
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XVII
Time : 3 Hrs.
MEASUREMENT AND
EVALUATION
(ME)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 70
Minimum Pass Marks: 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required tobe covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit
of the Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II Concepts of Measurement and Evaluation
• Meaning of measurement and evaluation.
• Nature and scope of evaluation programme.
• Need and importance of evaluation in the field of physical education.
• Principles of evaluation.
Unit-III Tests
• Criteria of test selection.
• Factors affecting scientific authenticity.
• Procedure to establish scientific authenticity.
• Classification of test (standardized and teacher made test).
• Construction of tests (knowledge and skill tests).
• Administration of testing programme and its procedure and follow-up.
Unit-IV Measurement of Physical Performance
• Copper’s 12 minute run walk test.
• Harvard step test.
• Motor fitness test (Oregon motor fitness test, JCR test, Canadian fitness test, AAHPER Youth Fitness Test,
Indiana Motor Fitness Test).
• General motor ability test.
o McCloy’s general motor ability test.
o Methany Johnson Test.
Unit-V Measurement of strength, skill and posture.
• Kraus-Weber’s muscular fitness test.
• Instrument for measuring strength.
• Roger’s Physical Fitness Index.
• Volleyball – Brady Volleyball Test, Russell and Lange Volleyball Test.
Basketball – Johnson test, Knox test.
Soccer – McDonald test and Johnson.
Badminton – Miller Volley Test.
Hockey – Dribbling and Goal shooting test.
• Measures of posture – IOWA posture test.
70
• Anthropometric Measurement.
- Girth Measurement – Upper arm, forearm, calf, and chest.
- Width Measurement – Biacrominal chest, illiocrestal, Biepcondylar.
- Height Measurement – stature and sitting height.
Practical Part
Practical knowledge of conducting all those tests given in the syllabus shall be tested.
Books Recommended
• Vijayalaksmi, M. “Evaluation in Physical Education” – (2006) Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee
Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Madhuri T . W, “Measurement and Evaluation in Physical Education” (2006) Friends Publication, 6,
Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Mishra, Sharad Chandra “Test and Measurement in Physical Education”(2005) Sports Publication, G-
6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• McCloy, C.H. “Test and Measurement in Physical Education” (2004) Friends Publication, 6,
Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Mathew Doland .K , “Measurement in Physical Education’, (1973) 4th edition, W.B. Saunders
Company, London.
• Barrow and McGhee, “A Practical Approach to Measurement in Physical Education”.
71
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XVIII
Time : 3 Hrs.
APPLIED COMPUTER
EDUCATION AND
STATISTICS IN
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(ACESPE)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 70
Minimum Pass Marks: 28
Practical Marks ; 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit-I Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit
of the Question Paper which is compulsory
UNIT-II (A)
• Introduction, characteristics, history and classification of computers. Applications of computers.
• Hardware, software, input / output devices secondary storage devices.
• Networking concepts – LAN, WAN etc. Topologies.
• Operating System – Types and functions of an operating system.
• Translation interprets compilers and assembles.
UNIT-II (B) INTERNET
Intranet :-log on to internet
Types of internet connectivity, electronic-mail ,world wide web(www)
Html (understanding html, history of html, html document, describing tags, how to create a
html programs
Memory: Primary and Secondary memory, RAM, ROM, cache memory etc
UNIT-III
• Windows Basics – start widows, exit widows, starting an application, run and manage, multiple
applications, close applications. File management through window copy, delete, creating files and
directories and printing a document.
• Basics of word-processing, text selection, opening documents and creating documents, saving
documents, printing documents, editing text, finding and replacing text, spell check, grammar, facility,
formatting document, adding bonders and shading, adding headers and footers using mail merge.
• Worksheet basics, data entry in cells, text and formulate working with workbooks. Cell referencing,
formatting and calculations, Autodial number formatting, date formatting, working with groups and
charts, printing charts.
• Desktop publishing packages, number viruses, introduction to power point and Slide Show
Presentations.
• Sports Related Software
UNIT-IV
• Meaning of Statistics.
• Meaning of single score and quantitative data: kinds of data (continuous and discrete).
• Construction of frequency tables.
• Measures of central tendency (Mean, Medium, mode) its meaning and uses in physical education.
• Percentiles and quartiles meaning and uses.
72
• Graphical representation of a data: frequency polygon, cumulative, smoothed polygon, bar diagrams
and pie diagrams.
• Standard Deviation (SD): Meaning, computation and its utility in Physical Education.
UNIT-V
Correlation – Meaning, computation, and its utility in Physical Education.
Analysis of Variance:- Need for Analysis of Variance and types of Analysis of Variance
Analysis of Covariance :-Need for Analysis of Covariance, Application of Analysis of Covariance
• Meaning of terms: population and sampling.
o Importance and Principles of sampling.
o Techniques of sampling (Random, stratified, cluster and systematic)
Practical Part
Practical experience of computer handling shall be given in the computer lab
To make a project in HTML
Power point presentation or slide show presentation
Books Recommended
• Verma, J.P. “Text book of Sports Statistics” (2006-07)- Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Shaw, Dhananjoy “Fundamental Statistics in Physical Education and Sports Sciences”, (2006-07)
Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Kutty, Suresh “Research Methods in Physical Education” ( 2005) Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B
EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
73
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XIX
Time : 3 Hrs.
HEALTH EDUCATION (HE) Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 90
Minimum Pass Marks: 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
• Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First
question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II Health Education
• Health Education: definition, scope principles and practice of health education, planning and
evaluation in health education programmes. Organisation and administrative set up of health services
in India.
Unit-III Diseases
• Disease: Diseases cycle, Epidemiological trials, mode of disease transmission immunity.
• Health Problem in India: Problems related to communicable diseases: (HIV- AIDs, Hepatitis,
Malaria, Rabies and Tetanus) nutrition, environmental sanitation, medical care and population.
• National family welfare programme and mother and child health.
• Need for sex education.
Unit-IV Hygiene
• Hygiene: The concept of hygiene and personal hygiene care of skin, mouth, nails, clothing: bathing
etc. importance of rest, sleep and exercise.
• Community Health: Brief account of housing water supply, sewerage and refuse disposal.
• School Health Service: History, School Health Problems. Health appraisal, healthful school
environment, nutritional services, mental health, school health, school health records, safety
measures in the playfields – first aid and emergency care.
Unit-V Nutrition
• Meaning and definition of food, nutrition, balanced diet.
• Constituent of balance diet, its functions and sources.
• Daily energy requirements.
• Eating before, during and after competition
• Water loading.
Books Recommended
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Pandey, P.K. and Gongopadhay, S. R. “Health Education for School Children”, Friends Publication,
6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi.
• Park, J.E. and Park , K. “Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine”, (1985) Bnasidar Bhanot ,
Publisher, Jabalpur-1985
• Park, J.E. and Park , K, “Text Book of Community Health for Nurses”, (1982) Asrani Publisher,
Jabalpur.
74
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XX
Time : 3 Hrs.
SOCIOLOGY OF SPORTS (SP) Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 90
Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will carry
two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in respective
four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given Internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –1
• Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First
question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Meaning, definition, nature and scope of sociology and sociology of sports.
• Basic concepts of sociology: family, society, community, association, institution, state, folks, culture,
value and norms.
• Relationship of sports sociology with other disciplines. Psychology, history of mankind and physical
education.
• Historical approaches to social theory: Agency theories (social action theory) and structure theories
(social system theories).
• The History of sociology of sport: The developmental phase of the sociology of sports - reflection,
reproduction and resistance.
• Methodology and future trends in the sociology of sport.
Unit-III
• Politics and sport: Definitions of politics, policy, the state and government.
• Women participation in the Olympic Games – (brief history of female experience of sport and
changing trends).
• Economy and sports industry, sponsorship, tourism, hotel industry and entertainment.
• Social exclusion (sexually, gender, race, age, ethnicity, disability location and poverty).;
• Brief description of social exclusion and poverty and its relationships with sport and leisure.
• Combating poverty and exclusion in sport and leisure – talent search schemes / cards.
Unit-IV
• Sports as a game occurrence
• Sports as an Institutional game.
• Sports as a social institution.
• Sports as a Social Situation or Social System.
• Sports and Sportsmanship.
• Sports and Personality.
Unit-V
• Background of sport and disability.
75
• Constraints of disabled people in participation in physical activity and sports; (lack of motivation and
confidence; negative school experience; no proper support from family, friends and society, lack of
information on opportunities; transport problems; lack of time and money; poor physical access; poor
knowledge of provisions among physical education teachers; poor physical education training for
teachers in special schools).
• The Paralympics movement: classification, integration and the Paralympics.
• Perspectives on disability sport.
• Sport as a form of therapy and socialization.
Books Recommended
• Barric Houlihan, “Sports and Society”, SAGE Publication, (2005) 2nd edition,New Delhi.
• Singh, Yadwinder “Sociology in Sports”, (2005) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Sharma, Sita Ram “Sociological Foundation in Physical Education and Sports”( 2004) Friends
Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Jay Coaklay, Sports in Society, (2004) McGraw Hill Publication.
76
ANNEXURE-III(Pages)
B.P.Ed.-THIRD YEAR
SYLLABUS OF ACTIVITY – SKILL & PROWESS AND TEACHING PRACTICE
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
ATHLETICS (Track and Field) for Men and Women
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of the event and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute including national and
international competitions.
3. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
4. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the event.
5. International rules and regulations of each event.
6. Importance of hygiene for an athlete.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Track Events
Hurdle Races
(a) Teaching Stages: Swinging leg action, Trailing leg action, Clearance of
hurdle emphasizing on proper trunk position action, Development of stride
rhythm from start to first hurdle, between hurdles and strides between the last
hurdle and finishing line
(b) Rules &Regulations for Competition.
Field Events
Pole Vault
(a) Teaching Stages: Pole grip and carry, the run and Pole plant, take off, Rock
back Pull up, Push up, bar clearance and Landing.
(b) Rules &Regulations for Competition.
Javelin Throw
(a) Teaching Stages: Techniques of holding and carrying javelin (Grip and
Carry-its types), Approach run, Last five strides rhythm, Delivery stance and Reverse
(b) Rules &Regulations for Competition.
Hammer Throw
(a) Teaching Stages: Grip, Initial Stance, Preliminary swings, Transition from
swings to turns, Turns, Delivery Stance, Delivery action ,Release and
Reverse.
(b) Rules &Regulations for Competition
Evaluation Plan (Equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
77
Books Recommended for Study
1. Singh, Baljeet “Athletic Conditioning” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
2. Novich M. Max, “Training & Conditioning of Athletes.” (1983)Lea & Febriger 600S. Washington
Square Philadelphia, PA 19106, USA
3. Bosen,Ken O.,”Track and Field Fundamental Techniques”, Patiala:N.I.S. Publication.
4. Dyson, Geoffrey HG, Edumndson, Joseph, “Athletics for Schools.” (1969) University of London
Press Ltd..
5. Doherty, J. Mannet, “Track&Field” Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice Hall Inc.
6. Dyoon, Geoffrey, G.H. The Mechanic of Athletics (1962) London University of London press Ltd.
7. Hodks, Gens.Application off Weight Training to Athletics (1962) Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice
Hall Inc.
8. Malhotra, Ashok Kumar A Guide to be an Athlete, Krishna Publication Books New Delhi.
9. Mohan, V.M. Athletics for beginners, Metropolitan Books New Delhi
78
B.PEd.-THIRD YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
TENNIS
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of tennis and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute including national and
international tournaments.
3. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
4. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a tennis player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Grips:
Eastern forehand grip, eastern backhand grip, western grip, continental grip and chopper grip.
Stance and Footwork
Basic Ground Strokes:
Forehand drive and backhand drive.
Basic Service
Basic Volley
Overhead Volley
Smash
Drop Shots
Chop
Tactics:
Offensive and defensive strokes.
Across offensive and defensive tactics.
Singles and doubles offensive and defensive tactics.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan(Equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
79
Books Recommended for Study
Chaudhary, Pankaj “Tennis Coaching Manual” (2005) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Cayer, Louis “ Double Tennis Tactics” ”(2004) 2nd edition - Human Kinetic Publisher inc. USA.
Brown, Jim.” Tennis Strokes Strategy and Programmes.”(1980), Prentice hall Inc. the Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersey.
Eighton Jim.”Inside Tennis-Tecniques of Winning.”Prentice Hall Inc. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey.
Howtan Marry.” How to Play Winning Tennis.”(1979),Ecothirtfy One West 39th Street, New York.
Trengove, Alan.”The Art of Tennis.”(1964), Holdex and Strayahten Ltd. Wravick Lane, New York.
80
B.P.Ed.-THIRD YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
YOGA
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of yoga and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute.
3. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
4. To equip the students with the knowledge of yogic system of exercise, its broad features, scope and
limitations.
5. To know the contribution of yogic practices for the promotion of various aspects of health and
fitness.
6. To know the benefits of yogic exercises , cautions and the therapeutic aspects of yoga.
7. To impart the knowledge of varieties of yogic practices with special reference to their significance of
their name, technique and utility.
8. To know about the nature of diet for human being as per the practices followed by the yogis.
9. International rules and regulations of the game.
10. Importance of hygiene for a yogi.
11. Etiquette.
12 Tests/Evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Meditative Poses:-
Sukhasana, swastikasana, padamasana, vajrasana and siddhasana.
Cultural Poses:-
Bhujangasana, dhanurasana, halasana, vakrasana, savasana, vrikshasana, tadasna, mayurasana,
parvatasana, Matsyasana, makarasana, shalabhasana,suryanamaskar, paschimotansana, ardhshalabhasana,
ardh-matsyendrasana, sarvangasana, shirshasana, naukasana, utkatasana etc.
Pranayama
Bandha:-Uddiyan
Mudra
Kriya
Evaluation Plan( Equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
81
Books Recommended for Study
Debnath, Monica “Basic Core Fitness through Yoga and Naturopathy” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-
6,23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Yogeswar, “Text Book of Yoga”,(2004) Penguin Books.
Harvey, Paul “Yoga for Everybody”, (2001)Tucker Slingsby Publisher Ltd.
Sharma, Lalita “All You Wanted to Know About Yoga”, (1991)Sterling Publisher Pvt. Ltd.
Kuvalayananda.”Asanas.”Popular Prakashan, Bombay.
Kuvalayananda.”Pranayama.”Popular Prakashan, Bombay.
Kuvalayananda AND Vinekar, S.L.”Yogic Therapy.”Central Bureau of Health Services, Ministry of Health,
Govt of India, New Delhi.
“Yoga Se Arogya.” Indian Yoga Society,Sagar.
“Yoga Mimasa.” Journal No. I to XIX, Kaivalyadhama Lonavala.
Yogeshwar.”Text Book of Yoga.” Yoga Centre, Mylopore, Madras.
82
B.PEd.-THIRD YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
HOCKEY
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15 Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of hockey and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute including important national and
international tournaments.
3. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
4. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a hockey player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Grip of Stick and Stance,
Rolling the Ball,
Dribbling,
Hitting the Ball,
Stopping the Ball,
Pushing the Ball,
Flick,
Jab,
Scoop,
Passing the Ball – Forward/straight pass, triangular pass and square pass.
Drills and lead - up games related with the skill taught.
ADVANCE SKILLS:-
Reverse hit and hitting on the wrong foot.
Stopping the ball – on the right side, on the left side and in the air.
Pushing the ball on the wrong foot.
Reverse flick.
Dodging (through the legs, right and left sides).
Tackling - from front, right and left sides.
Passing – through pass, diagonal pass and return pass.
Common bully.
Positional play in attack and defense.
Drills and lead-up games.
Evaluation Plan(equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
83
Books Recommended for Study
Aora, Monica “ Hockey Coaching Manual (2005) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Tronson, Mark, “ Esanda’s World Hockey” (1984) International Hockey Federation Publishing.
Ahmad Khan, Eraj.” Hokey for Boys and Girls.”(1976), Scientific Book Company, Patna, Bihar.
Flint, Rachael, H. ”Women’s Hockey.”(1976),Pelham Books Ltd. London.
Kapur. ”Rules of Hockey with Interpretations – Boys and Girls.”(1975).
Milford, D.S. ”Hockey Practice and Tactics.”(1949),Edward Arnold and Company,
London.
Singh,Gian and Walia Kuku.”Learn Hockey-This Way.”(1975), International Hockey Institute, New Delhi,
India.
Thani, Yograj.”Hockey.” 1976.
Wein, Horts.”The Science of hockey.”(1979). Pelham Books Ltd. London.
84
B.PEd.-THIRD YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
CRICKET
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of cricket and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute including important national and
international tournaments.
3. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
4. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
5. To familiarize with methods of construction, lay-out and marking of cricket field and pitch.
6. International rules and regulations of the game.
7. Importance of hygiene for a cricket player.
8. Etiquette.
9. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Batting(Grip, stance and strokes)Strokes in front of the wicket:-
Straight drive, forward defensive stroke, backward defensive stroke, Forward off drive, forward on
drive, forward cut and square cut.
Batting-Strokes behind the wicket:-
Late cut, hook and leg glance.
Bowling (Breaks):-
Off break, leg break and goggle.
Bowling (Spin):-
Spin bowling – Off spin bowling and leg spin bowling; short ball and long ball.
Fielding:-
Defensive fielding (orthodox and un-orthodox) and offensive field.
Catching:-
High catching and slip catching.
Stopping and throwing technique
Wicket keeping technique
Drills and lead-up games.
Evaluation Plan(Equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended for Study
Aora, Monica “ Cricket Coaching Manual (2005) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Srivastava, V.K. “ Analysis of Cricket” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Hibra,E.B.”Cricket.”N.I.S. Publishing House,Patiala,Punjab.
John Snow.”cricket.”(1975),William Dusmoby Publisher Ltd.London.
Mustaq,M.S.”How to Play Cricket.”(1981), Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.
The Cricket Coaching Manual By: Frank Tyson.
85
B.P.Ed.-THIRD YEAR
PART-C( TEACHING PRACTICE)
TEACHING PRACTICE
Max.Marks: 200 Marks
Practical : 160 Marks
Internal Assessment: 40Marks
Objectives:-
1. Importance of teaching practice in physical education.
2. To develop efficiency in the conduct and teaching of physical activities of formal nature.
3. To prepare the student-teacher to face the students in theory as well as activity classes.
4. To provide practical experience to prepare lesson plan for teaching Free Hand Exercises
emphasizing on physical fitness, rhythmic sense and neuro-muscular co- - ordination.
5. To provide practical experience to prepare lesson plan for theory/knowledge lesson for teaching
subject in the class room.
6. to teach and provide experience for organized physical education activities, emphasizing on skill
learning, leadership, orderly behaviour and enjoyment.
7. To develop the skill of teaching of students of different age groups and different gender.
8. To prepare the students to handle the class of different durations.
9. To familiarize with different Teaching-Aids.
10. To prepare the student-teacher to handle the class effectively and efficiently during the
university examination in the presence of the external examiner/s.
Review of the syllabus taught in B.P.ED.-FIRST and SECOND YEAR
FORMAL LESSONS (Ten lessons in each area –Athletics, games, calisthenics and theory)
During B.P.Ed.- Second Year student-teachers have already been oriented to field as well as class
room teaching. In B.P.Ed.-third year, it will be added with formal teaching work (theory and practical)
in the adopted schools that will be a full syllabus of school teaching –Secondary and Senior Secondary
schools.
ACTIVITY / SKILL LESSON(An activity lesson will comprise of the following parts):-
1. Preliminary and preparatory steps of an activity/skill lesson plan –Name of the institution, Nature of
the lesson (General/Specific), lesson No., date, time, duration, name and roll no. of students,
name of the activity, skill to be taught, required play field, required equipment etc.
2. Objectives – General and specific.
3. Main parts of a lesson-Time, contents, procedure and organization.
4. Sub-parts of a lesson – Introductory part, main part, recreation/lead-up part and concluding part.
THEORY/KNOWLEDE LESSON (A theory/knowledge lesson will comprise of the following parts):-
1. Preliminary and preparatory steps of a theory/knowledge lesson plan: Lesson No, Date, Name
of the Institution, Class with Section, Subject, Unit, Topic, Type/Nature of Lesson Time and duration,
Name of Student-Teacher, Class & Roll No.
2. Objectives: General and Specific.
3. Teaching Aids: as per the requirement of subject contents to be taught.
4. Assumed Previous Experience/s: Related with topic to be taught.
5. Motivational Techniques: To maintain the interest of the students in learning the topic.
86
6. Statement of Objective/s: Topic of the day is to be disclosed.
7. Presentation: Teaching points, Teacher’s Activities – Methods, Techniques, Devices and
Procedure to be employed.
8. Students’/Pupils’ Activities: For better and effective learning, active participation/ involvement
of students must be ensured repeatedly.
9. Recapitulation: Whatever is taught is to be repeated briefly.
10. Class Work: To know the status of learning, the students are given class work on the spot and the
learning level is adjudged and the result is used as feedback for future teaching.
EVALUATION OF A LESSON PLAN-The following aspects of a lesson may be evaluated:
1. Planning of the lesson,
2. Teaching Ability of the Student-Teacher,
3. Class Control,
4. Pupils’ Response,
5. Resourcefulness of the Student-Teacher, and
6. Personality of the Student-Teacher.
CRITERIA FOR THE EVALUATION/ASSESSMENT OF A LESSON-The quality of teaching may be
evaluated/assessed through the following points:-
1. Preparation of a lesson plan,
2. Selection of suitable activity/skill/topic etc.,
3. Creativity,
4. Marking of the area in case of activity or skill teaching and preparation of class room in case of
class room teaching,
5. Appearance – dress-up, grooming etc.
6. Presentation, demonstration and explanation,
7 Use of formations, apparatus, drum, music, whistle, teaching aids etc,
8. Position of the student-teacher,
9. Command, voice and confidence in teaching,
10. Discipline and class control,
11. Class management,
12. Detection and correction of mistakes,
13. Safety precautions, and
14. Overall impression.
IMPORTANT NOTE:-Each student-teacher is required to take ten lessons in each area of examination, i.e.
class room teaching, athletic, games and calisthenics in the current academic session. Each lesson will be
evaluated out of 50 marks, each which includes 20% internal assessment component.
87
TITLES OF THE SUBJECTS FOR BACHELOR OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(B.P.Ed.) – FOUR-YEAR PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMME
B.P.Ed. FOURTH YEAR (THEORY) – PART -A (Annexure-D)
1. Organisational Behaviour (Paper-XXI)
2. Sports Journalism (Paper-XXII)
3. Yoga (Paper-XXIII).
4. Scientific Approach to Sports Training (Paper-XXIIV).
5. Health, Physical Fitness and Aerobics (Paper-XXV).
6. Officiating and Coaching (Paper-XXVI).
7. Applied Physiotherapy and Rehabilitation (Paper-XXVII).
Note:
1. Scheme of study of Part-A (Theory) & Part-D (Specializations) and Part-E (Internship) is
given in Annexure-D, followed by Syllabus of Part-A (Theory)
2. Syllabus for Part-D (Specializations) and Instructions for Part-E (Internship in the schools)
are given in Annexure-IV at the end of the theory syllabus.
88
ANNEUXRE-D
(Study Scheme of Part-A, D and E)
B.P. Ed – Fourth Year
Part-A (Theory)
Paper Title of the subjects with code Credit Marks Internal
Assessment
Paper-XXI Organisational Behaviour (OB) 1 90 10
Paper-XXII Sports Journalism (SJ) 1 70+20p* 10
Paper-XXIII Yoga (YG) 1 90 10
Paper-XXIV Scientific Approach to Sports
Training (SAST)
1 90 10
Paper-XXV Health, Physical Fitness and
Aerobics (HPFA)
1 90 10
Paper-XXVI Officiating and Coaching (OC) 1 90 10
Paper-XXVII Applied Physiotherapy and
Rehabilitations (APR)
1 70+20p* 10
* P – Stands for marks for practical component
Part-D (Compulsory Fields of Specializations)
Specializations Contents of
Specializations
Credit Marks Internal
Assessment
Athletics Coaching and
Officiating
1 40+40=80 20
Game (A Game of Choice of the
Student (Hockey, Football,
Basketball, Volleyball, Cricket,
Swimming, Badminton, Kabaddi,
Kho-Kho, Boxing and Lawn
Tennis as per the syllabus
-do- 1 40+40=80 20
Options-Health Fitness and Gym
Management or Yoga or Training
for Life Guard for Water Sports –
as per the syllabus
1. Emphasis of
Health and Fitness
Through Physical
Works-outs
(strength/ cardio /
aerobics / flexibility
etc.) and Diet.
2. Yoga as a life
(Theory and
Practice)
3. Emphasis on Life
Saving Drills
1 40+40=80 20
Important instructions for the student / teachers / external examiners:
1. 3x10=30 lessons (Coaching and Officiating) shall be taken by each student under the supervision of
the teacher in the institution itself.
2. Principal of the college with the consultation of the Head, Department of Physical Education of the
college will inform the university about the options exercised by the students to appoint external
examiners accordingly.
3. A set of external and internal examiners will conduct annual university examination as per the rules
and regulations of the course.
4. Each lesson will be of 100 marks including 20 marks of internal assessment. The
examination will be held out of 80 marks (40 marks officiating and 40 marks coaching
including viva voce) for athletics and game lessons. Similarly for optional activities,
89
examination will be held out of 80 marks (40 marks for practical and 40 marks for
theory and viva voce).
5. Each student is required to pass separately in theory, practical and respective assessment.
6. Six hours per day will be devoted for theory and practice, i.e. three hours for theory and three hours
for practical work / day.
Part E (Internship)
Internship of three months duration is compulsory in the schools for which A CERTIFICATE will be
issued by the Principal of the College stating that so and so has completed his / her internship of three months
duration from ________ to _______ at __________ school.
Note: for correction
Each specialization will be of 100 marks including 20 marks of internal assessment.
The examination will be held out of 80 marks (40 marks for practical and 40 marks for theory
and viva voce).
90
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Fourth Year
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXI
Time : 3 Hrs.
ORGANISATIONAL
BEHAVIOUR
(OB)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90
Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
NOTE:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over five units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short-answer type questions spread
over the entire syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
c) Rest of the Paper shall contain Four Units. Each Unit of the Syllabus required to be covered
in respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each Unit (Unit II-IV) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal
choice, i.e. the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit I
Entire Syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type
question in First Question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit II
Organizational Behaviour: - Concept, Meaning, Definition and Nature of Organizational
Behaviour, Other Fields of Study-Sociology, Psychology, Management, Physical Education &
Sports. Models of Organizational Behaviour. Challenges and Opportunities for Organizational
Behaviour. Individual Behaviour – Foundations of Individual Behaviour. Models of Man, Individual
Behaviour and Performance.
Unit III
Personality: - Introduction, Meaning, Determinants, Theories of Personality and Impact of
Personality on Organisational Behaviour.
Perception: - Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Nature, Perceptual Process. Managing the
Perceptual Process.
Attitudes & Values: - Introduction, Meaning, Definition & Components of Attitudes, Functions,
Types and Attitude Formation. Meaning and Importance, Types and Change of Attitudes. Meaning,
Definition, Importance, Types and Sources of Values and Organizational Behaviour.
Organisational Behaviour Modification: Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Steps, Utilities and
Application of Organisational Behaviour Modification.
Unit IV
91
Motivation:- Introduction, Meaning & Definition, Importance, Theories of Motivation,
Management of Motivation.
Leadership:- Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Characteristics of Leadership, Dynamics of
Managerial Leadership, Transition of Leadership Theories. Power & Politics.
Communication:- Introduction, Meaning & Definition. Nature of Communication. Barriers to
Communication & Making Communication Effective. Overcoming Barriers to Communication.
Morale:- Introduction, Meaning & Definition. Causes & Warning Signs of Low Morale. Factors
in Improving Morale.
Unit V
Group Dynamics:-Introduction & Definition of Group Dynamics. Team Building & Group
Dynamics. Working Team & Team Effectiveness. Intra-Team Dynamics. Inter-Group Relations.
Factors Affecting Group Cohesiveness. Interpersonal Behaviour (Transactional Analysis), Benefits
and Utility of Transactional Analysis.
Management of Change:- Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Types & Forces for Change.
Managing the Planned Change. Human Reactions to Change.
Management of Stress:- Introduction, Meaning, Nature & Sources of Stress, Consequences of
Stress and Coping Strategies for Stress.
Management of Conflict:- Introduction, Meaning and Definition of Conflict, Conflict, Competition
and Rivalry. Important things related with Conflict, Causes, Signs, Stages and Management of
Conflict.
References:-
1. “Organisation Behaviour (1996) Stephen Robbins New Delhi, Prentice Hall.
2. “Organisational Behaviour” Fred Luthans (1997) New York, Mc Graw Hill.
3. “Organisational Behaviour; Human Behaviour at Work” Keith Davis & John
W.Newstorm (1997) New York, Mc Graw Hill.
4. “Behavioural Process in Organisation” Pareek Udai (1981) New Delhi, Oxford & IBH
Publishing Co.
5. “Organisational Behaviour” Shashi K.Gupta & Rosy Joshi. (2008) Kalyani Publishers,
Ludhiana(PB).
92
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. Ed. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXII
Time : Three Years
SPORTS JAURNALISM
Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 28 Marks
Practical : 20 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First
question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Meaning, definition and concept of journalism.
• Historical background of journalism.
• Introduction to Mass Media; Print, Electronic and Informal media.
• Role of Journalism in society.
• Role of IT in Journalism.
Unit-III
• Definition of news, basic news elements and values, news story.
• Qualities and responsibilities of sports news reporters.
• Organisation of sports news desk.
• Duties and responsibilities of sports sub editor, photo journalist.
Unit-IV
• Amateurism v/s professionalism: invasion of private life, emphasis on winning, sportsmanship and
sports for charity.
• Writing Sports Features: Types of sports features, exclusive features, fearless writing in sports, sports
personalities and their thumb nail sketches.
• Interviewing sports persons.
Unit-V
• Reviewing sports books
• Writing sports editorials.
• Writing weekly or fortnightly column.
• Covering local / national sports competitions.
• Covering sports for radio and television channels (Art of Commentating)
Practical Work: (Project reports to be prepared, evaluated and viva voce conducted by the teacher
concerned).
1. Writing press releases.
93
2. Writing script for interviews with sportspersons. Writing sports stories with a view to promote sports in
community.
3. Writing sports editorial.
Suggestions for Teaching
1. The teacher needs to be very resourceful to arrange visits of students to various News offices to
acquire first hand experience in writing Sports News.
Reference Books
• Mishra, Sharad “ Text Book of Sports Journalism”( 2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6,23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi
• Sita Ram , “Text Book of Sports Journalism”, “(2004) Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr.
Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Conrad .C. Fink, Sports Wing, Surjeet Publication, 7 Kholapur Road, Kamala Nagar, Delhi.
• Ahuja, B.N. and Chhabra, S.S. “Principles and Techniques of Journalism”, Surjeet Publication, 7
Kholapur Road, Kamala Nagar, Delhi
• Keval. J. Kumar, “Mass Communication in India”,2004, Jaico Publishing House-121, Mahatma
Gandhi Road, Mumbai-400023.
• Agarwal,V.B AND Gupta, V.S Handbook of Journalism and mass comm.. 2001, Concept publishing
company.
94
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. ED. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXIII
Time : Three Hours
YOGA Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 28 Marks
Practical Marks : 20 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each Unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in first Question/Unit of
the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II :
• Introduction.
• Historical background and Origin of Yoga.
• Meaning and Concept of Yoga and its relationship with Physical Education and Sports.
• Yoga in present global scenario; Yoga as a Science; and recent advances in Yoga.
• Contribution of Modern Yogis: Ramakrishana Parmahamsa, Yogananda, Swami
Vivekananda, Swami Sivananda, Swami Satyananda and Srila Prabhupad.
Unit-III :
• Relevance of Patanjali’s “Asthangyog in 21th century.
• Main Yogic Texts: Vedas & Upanishad, Hathayoga Pradeepika, Gheranda Samhitta, Yoga
Sutra and Shrimad Bhagvad Gita.
• Yoga as activity: i) Yam, ii) Niyama, iii) Asanas, iv) Pranayama, v) Pratyahar.
• Yoga as Relaxation: vi) Dharna, vii) Dhayan and viii) Samadhi.
Unit-IV : Meditation & Shat Kriyas:
• Meaning, Definition, Types and Techniques of Meditation.
• Shat Kriyas of Yoga: Neti; Dhauti; Basti, Nauli, Kapalbhati and Trataka.
Unit-V
• Bandhs and Mudras; Aim, objectives and benefits. Physiological aspects of various bandhs and
mudras.
• Therapeutic and Corrective Values of Yoga Practices special reference to disease like: Diabetes,
Asthma, Constipation, Obesity, Cervical, Gastric and Acidity.
Practical Part:
• Asanas, Pranayam, Mudras, Bandhs and Kiryas
• Meditation Techniques, Yoga therapy and special techniques.
95
Reference Books
• Debnath, Monica “Basic Core Fitness through Yoga and Naturopathy” (2006-07) Sports Publication,
G-6,23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Yogeswar, “Text Book of Yoga”,(2004) Penguin Books.
• Harvey, Paul “Yoga for Everybody”, (2001)Tucker Slingsby Publisher Ltd.
• Sharma, Lalita “All You Wanted to Know About Yoga”, (1991)Sterling Publisher Pvt. Ltd.
• Sarawati, S Satyananda “Asana, Pranayam, Mudra and Bandhas”.
• Iyengar, B.K.S. “The Illustrated Light of Yoga”(1982) Great Britain, George Allenand Unwin.
• Osho, “Dhayan Vigyan” A Rebel Book, (2005)Tao Publishing Pvt. Ltd., 50 Koregoan Park , Pune-
411001, MS India.
• Osho, “144 Meditation” A Rebel Book, (2006)Tao Publishing Pvt. Ltd., 50 Koregoan Park , Pune-
411001, MS India.
• Osho, “Meditation the First and the Last Freedom”(2006) A Rebel Book, Tao Publishing Pvt. Ltd.,
50 Koregoan Park , Pune-411001, MS India.
96
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. ED. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXIV
Time : Three Years
SCIENTIFIC APPROACH TO
SPORTS TRAINING
Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 36 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in first
Question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• History of Science of Sports Training, Meaning, definition, aim, objectives and characteristics of sports
training and conditioning.
• Functions and subject matter of science of sports training.
• Training Load and its types. Structure of training load. Principles of training load. Principles of
Intensity and volume. Adaptation – meaning and process.
• Planning and Periodisation of Training: Meaning and their types. Development of competitive sports in
India.
Unit-III
• Physical and Motor Fitness: Meaning of physical fitness and motor fitness; Components of physical
and motor fitness; means and methods of their development.
• Warming-up and cooling down and their benefits. Training Methods (Continuous Running / Training,
Interval Training, Fartlek Running / Training, Circuit, Alternate, Weight Training and Competition and
Test); Their variables and characteristics.
• Meaning of plyometrics, cross training, sports stretch / flexibility and their benefits.
Unit-IV
• Conditions of achieving a high standard of athletic efficiency. Identification of Talent: Pre-requisites
and conditions for developing suitable young athlete, principles of early recognition of athletic talent,
basic factors determining performance and important indicators to determine athlete’s aptitude.
• Age related specific characteristics of anatomical, physiological, psychological and motor
development of children and adults.
• Factors Affecting Sports Performance: Physical factors: Climate, Nutrition, Smoking, Sex Sleep and
Pharmacological aids; physiological factors: Blood cells, muscle fibers, heart size, and lungs size;
psychological factors; Stress, tension and anxiety.
Unit-V
• Energy for performance – Concept of energy, sources of energy (Carbohydrate, protein, and fat),
training diet, competition nutrition (pre-competition, during competition and after competition) and food
for recovery.
• Ergogenic Aids: Antioxidant supplements, protein supplements, meal replacement products, creatine,
glutamine, pre-hormones, ephedrine, caffeine. Creatine as an ergogenic aid.
• Athlete’s protein needs and myths.
97
Reference Books
• Sharma, N.P. “Sports Science”,(2004) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New Delhi.
• Ronald P. Pfeijjer “Concept of Athletic Training”, (2002)Jones and Bartlett Publishers.
• Bean, Anita “The Complete Guide to Sports Nutrition : How to eat for maximum Performance”,
(2000)3rd Edition, Published by A & C Black Ltd. London.
• Baechle, Thomas R. and Earle Roger W. “Essential Strength Training and Conditioning”,
(2000)Human Kinetic Publisher inc. USA.
• Singh, Hardyal “Science of Sports Training”, (1991) D.V.S. Publication New Delhi– 1991.
• Singh, Hardyal “Scientific Approach of Sports Training”, (1991) D.V.S. Publication New Delhi.
98
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. ED. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXV
Time : Three Years
HEALTH, PHYSICAL FITNESS
AND AEROBICS
Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 36 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in first
Question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Concept of health, definition of health, factors affecting health and dimensions of health.
• Life style-general considerations (food, sleep, work stress, rest and recreation, obesity, physical
fitness and exercise, intellectual activity, health and happiness, home and marriage, religion and
health, social life, alcohol, hot beverage and cold drinks, aging gracefully, and affluence and health.
• Moderation and healthy life style based on simple living and high thinking environment, home,
clothing, diet, work, stress, physical activity, physical fitness, body weight, intellectual activity, sexual
activity, personal habits, pregnancy and lactation, identification of chronic disease and preventive
measures.
• Factors responsible for heart problem: Life style, psychological and social factors, behavioral
conditions, geographical conditions and economical condition. Preventive measures for heart
problems.
Unit-III
• Meaning and definitions of physical fitness, health related fitness, motor fitness, wellness and wellbeing.
• Components of fitness and their description: Physical fitness, health related fitness, motor fitness, and
wellness.
• Aim, objectives, and means and methods of development of fitness components.
• Fitness Testing-Cardio respiratory capacity, flexibility, muscular strength, muscular endurance, speed,
power, agility and body composition.
Unit-IV
• Weight Training or Resistance Training : Concept and benefits of General Warm-up and specific
warm-up, Basic principles of weight training, training goals ( body type’s, basic and dietary goals)
and benefits of weight training.
• Main muscle groups of the bodyChest, upper arm, shoulders, upper back, thigh, abdominal, forearms,
lower back, hip and lower leg.
• Different forms of muscular contractions-Concentric contraction, eccentric contraction, isometric
contraction, iso-kinetic concentration and plyometric muscle action.
99
• Weight training and Women: Increased strength and power, improved sports performance, enhanced
self image and competitive outlet.
Unit-V
• Aerobics; Concept of aerobics, second wind, steady state and oxygen debt, the aerobic exercise
programme (Field and Gym) Brisk walk, jogging, running, rope skipping, swimming, dance, stepper
exercise, jogger, bicycle, treadmill, workouts with light weight. Advantage of swimming over running.
• Nutritional Requirements: Basic nutrition, dietary goals, protein, carbohydrate, fat, vitamins, mineral,
water, fibre; Basic diets: health foods and junk / fast foods.
• Obesity: Causes of obesity and remedial measures.
• Over weight: Causes and remedial measures.
Reference Books:
• Debnath, Monica “Basic Core Fitness through Yoga and Naturopathy” (2006-07) Sports Publication,
G-6,23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Barbara, A. Brehn “Successful Fitness: Motivation and Strategies”, (2004)Human Kinetic Publisher
inc. USA.
• Wayne, Viljoen “The Weight Training Hand Book”, (2003)1st Edition, New Holland Publisher.
• Charles, B. Corbin “Fitness for Life”, (2001)Globe Fearon.
• Charles, B. Corbin and et al. “Concept of Physical Fitness”, (2000)10th Edition McGraw Hill
Publication.
• Bean, Anita “The Complete Guide to Sports Nutrition: How to eat for maximum performance”,
(2000) 3rd Edition, Published by A & C Black Ltd. London
• Nigel Champion and Greg Hurst, “The Aerobics Instructor Handbook”-(1999).
100
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. ED. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXVI
Time : Three Years
OFFICIATING AND COACHING Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 36 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in first
Question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Meaning of officiating and coaching. Nature and scope of officiating and coaching.
• Basic principles of officiating and coaching.
• Qualifications (Educational and Professional) and qualities of a good official.
• Conditions of a good referee / umpire and measures for improving the standard of referee / umpire.
• The Coach: Philosophy of coaching: coaching styles (leadership role); Characteristics of a good
coach. Relationship of a coach and athlete; and bench coaching.
Unit-III
• National and International governing bodies of athletics and their functions.
• Officiating and coaching of athletic events: interpretation of rules and regulations governing the track
and field events including marking procedure of track and field arenas.
• Officials required for conducting a standard athletic meet and their duties and responsibilities.
• Equipment required for conducting each event.
• Dress code for officials.
Unit-IV
• National and international governing bodies of each game and their functions.
• Officiating and Coaching of Games (Hockey, Football, Basketball, Volleyball, Cricket) – Interpretation
of rules and regulations governing each game including marking procedure of play fields / courts.
• Officials required for conducting a standard championship / tournament and their duties and
responsibilities.
• Equipment required for conducting each game.
• Dress code for officials.
Unit-V
• National and international governing bodies of each game and their functions.
• Officiating and Coaching of Games (Badminton, Table Tennis, Kabaddi, Kho-Kho, Handball) –
Interpretation of rules and regulations governing each game including marking procedure of play fields
/ courts.
• Officials required for conducting a standard championship / tournament and their duties and
responsibilities.
101
• Equipment required for conducting each game.
• Dress code for officials.
Reference Books
• Williams Patrick and Diane S., “Becoming A Professional Coach”, (2007)Norton Publication
• Sharma, N.P. “Officiating and Coaching in Sports”, (2005) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New Delhi.
• Tandon, K. “Officiating and Coaching”, Published by Tandon Publication, Book Market, Ludhiana
(PB).
• Rules Books approved by the respective Association/ Federation recognized by IOC/ IOA.
• Singh, Yadwinder “Sports Officiating and Coaching”, (2005) Sports Publication, G-6,23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
102
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. ED. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXVII
Time : Three Years
APPLIED PHYSIOTHERAPY
AND REHABILITATION
Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 28 Marks
Practical : 20 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First
question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Meaning and definition of physiotherapy. Concept of athletic trainer and sports physician.
• Role of physical education teacher / coaches in athlete’s care and rehabilitation.
• Team medical care, its concept and approaches. Hygiene in campus and competitions.
• Massage: meaning, physiological effects, points to be considered in massage, types of massage
(Stroking manipulation, effleurage, pressure manipulation, kneading, petrisage, friction, percussion
manipulation, hacking, clapping, beating, pounding, and shaking manipulation). Contradiction of
massage.
Unit-III
• Posture, definition, concept and fundamental positions (lying, sitting, standing, reading and writing).
• Cause, affects and disadvantage of poor posture and values of good posture.
• Postural Deviations: Meaning types (Round Shoulder, Kyphosis, Lordosis, Scioliosis, Knock-knee,
bowlegs and flat-foot) their causes and corrective exercises.
Unit-IV
• Common athletic injuries: Sprains, strains, contusions, abrasions and fracture, their causes,
symptoms, treatment and preventive measures.
• Drugs and doping: History, definition and classification.
• Role of managers, coaches, national and international agencies and social organizations in controlling
the drug and doping problems.
Unit-V
• Basic concept of physiotherapeutic technique such as: hydrotherapy, thermotherapy, hot and cold
packs, whirlpool, contrast bath, paraffin bath, infrared, short wave diathermy and ultra sound.
• Indications and contra-indications of each technique.
• Role of ice in treatment in sports injuries.
• Concept of health club, sauna bath, steam bath and health related massage.
103
Practical Work: (Project reports to be prepared, evaluated and viva voce conducted by the teacher
concerned)
1. Practical classes for various techniques of massage to be conducted in the lab.
2. Practical classes for different physiotherapy techniques.
3. Practical classes for corrective exercises.
Reference Books
• Brown D. W. and Sandra White, “The Complete Guide to Aromatherapy: Massage and
Reflexology”,(2005) Quantum Publishing Ltd.
• Narayan, S. Lakshmi, “Text Book of Therapeutic Exercise”, (2005) Jaypee Brothers-2005.
• Goel, R.N. “Physiotherapy” (VOL.1-2) 1ST Edition- (2000).
• Gungburg, Robert “Current Concepts in Prevention, Diagnosis and Treatment of the Cervical
Whiplash Syndrome”, (1998) Lippincott- Raven Publusher.
104
ANNEXURE-IV
B.P. ED. FOURTH YEAR
PART-D: (Specialization Fields)
Officiating and Coaching Lessons Max. Marks : 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment : 20 Marks
Objectives
1. Importance of Officiating and Coaching in Sports.
2. To develop efficiency in the conduct of tournament and bring about technical expertise in athletics
events.
3. To prepare the student-teacher for coaching and officiating jobs.
4. To provide practical experience to prepare officiating and coaching lesson paln for track and field
events.
5. To familiarize the student-teacher with different officiating and coaching techniques.
ATHLETICS
General Knowledge
(1) Meaning of Athletics / Track and Field and athlete.
(2) History of Athletics (World / India)
(3) Analytical view of performance of Indian athletes (Men and Women) at the international scene.
(4) Critical analysis of priorities of Government (State / Centre) for the promotion of athletics in the
country.
(5) Amateurism v/s professionalism in athletics and their long term affects.
(6) National and International Athletics Organisations and their respective role in the promotion of
athletics.
(7) Drug/ doping in athletics and national / international dope controlling bodies and their success/
failures.
(8) Sports awards / honours.
Technical Knowledge
Marking of 400 meters and 200 meter tracks including field arenas.
Specialized Knowledge
1. Energy Source, Biomechanical concepts involved in running, jumping and throwing events.
2. Officiating and coaching with each event (interpretation of rules and regulations).
3. Fundamental skills-full description of technique and tactics (sprints, hurdles, running , jumping,
throwing, walk, long distance running including cross country, road races, road walk and marathon).
4. Guidelines for selection / talent identification criteria for sprinters, middle and long distance, runners,
hurdlers (low and high hurdles), jumping and throwing events.
5. Background of each event and development of general and specific physical fitness / motor fitness.
6. Concepts of warming up and cooling down and their physiological and psychological benefits.
7. Principles of sport training and conditioning physical and physiological training, technical training,
tactical training, psychological training and theoretical training and variables of training.
8. Plyometric Training: its concept, plyometric programme (lower body plyometrics, upper body
plyometrics and middle body plyometrics).
9. Cross Training – meaning benefits and necessity of cross training.
10. Rest and recovery – its factors / causes and techniques.
11. Fatigue, over training and burnout types causes, monitoring, treating and preventing over training and
burnouts.
12. Methods of training, planning, loading, periodisation, adaptation, and super compensation cycle.
13. Factors facilitating for peaking for competitions.
105
14. Athletes’ care (Rehabilitation and Reconditioning and diet during training, pre-competition, during
competition and post competition special reference to water and carbohydrate loading.
Evaluation Plan (Officiating and Coaching Lesson):
Criteria for the evaluation / assessment of a lesson. The quality of coaching lesson may be evaluated /
assessed through the following points:
1. Preparation of a lesson plan.
2. Selection of suitable activity / skill / topics etc.
3. Creativity.
4. Marking of the area in case of activity or skill coaching and officiating.
5. Appearance – dress-up, grooming etc.
6. Presentation, demonstration and explanation.
7. Use of formations, apparatus, whistle, officiating and coaching aids etc.
8. Position of the student teacher.
9. Command, voice and confidence in officiating and coaching.
10. Discipline and class control.
11. Class management.
12. Detection and correction of mistakes.
13. Safety precautions.
14. Overall impressions.
15. Performance Test.
16. Written / viva voce.
17. Professional attitude, and
18. Record Book.
Reference Books
1. Singh, Baljeet “Athletic Conditioning” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
2. Novich M. Max, “Training & Conditioning of Athletes.” (1983)Lea & Febriger 600S. Washington
Square Philadelphia, PA 19106, USA
3. Bosen,Ken O.,”Track and Field Fundamental Techniques”, Patiala:N.I.S. Publication.
4. Dyson, Geoffrey HG, Edumndson, Joseph, “Athletics for Schools.” (1969) University of London
Press Ltd..
5. Doherty, J. Mannet, “Track&Field” Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice Hall Inc.
6. Dyoon, Geoffrey, G.H. The Mechanic of Athletics (1962) London University of London press Ltd.
7. Hodks, Gens.Application off Weight Training to Athletics (1962) Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice
Hall Inc.
8. Malhotra, Ashok Kumar A Guide to be an Athlete, Krishna Publication Books New Delhi.
9. Mohan, V.M. Athletics for beginners, Metropolitan Books New Delhi.
106
GAMES (One game of the choice of the students – Hockey, Football, Basketball, Volleyball, Cricket,
Swimming, Badminton, Kabaddi and Kho-Kho and Boxing)
Max. Marks : 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment : 20 Marks
Objectives
1. Importance of Officiating and Coaching in Sports.
2. To develop efficiency in the conduct of tournament and bring about technical expertise in athletics
events.
3. To prepare the student-teacher for coaching and officiating jobs.
4. To provide practical experience to prepare officiating and coaching lesson paln for track and field
events.
5. To familiarize the student-teacher with different officiating and coaching techniques.
General Knowledge
1. Meaning of games and sport.
2. History of respective game (World/ India).
3. Analytical view of performance of Indian in respective game (Men and Women) at the international
scene.
4. Critical analysis of priorities of Government (State / Centre) for the promotion of game and sport in the
country.
5. Amateurism v/s professional in games/ sports and their long term affects.
6. National and International Organisation of game / sport (Association / Federation) and their respective
role in the promotion of athletics.
7. Drug / doping in games / sports and national / international dope controlling bodies and their success /
failures.
8. Sports awards / honours.
Technical Knowledge
Marking of respective play fields / court.
Specialized Knowledge
1. Energy Source, Biomechanical concepts involved in respective game / sport.
2. Officiating and coaching of respective game / sport (interpretation of rules and regulations)
3. Fundamental skills-full description of skill, technique and tactics involved in respective game / sport.
4. Systems of play.
5. Guidelines for selection / talent identification criteria for respective game/ sport.
6. Background of respective game and development of general and specific physical fitness / motor
fitness.
7. Concepts of warming up and cooling down and their physiological and psychological benefits.
8. Principles of sport training and conditioning - Physical and physiological training, technical training,
tactical training, psychological training and theoretical training and variables of training.
9. Plyometric Training: its concept, plyometric programme (lower body plyometrics, upper body
plyometrics and middle body plyometrics).
10. Cross Training – meaning, benefits and necessity of cross training.
11. Rest and recovery – its factors / causes and techniques.
12. Fatigue, over training and burnout - types causes, monitoring, treating and preventing over training
and burnouts.
13. Methods of training, planning, loading, periodisation, adaptation, and supercompensation cycle.
14. Factors facilitating for peaking for competitions.
15. Sportsmen’s care (Rehabilitation and Reconditioning) and diet during training, pre-competition, during
competition and post competition special reference to water and carbohydrate loading.
Evaluation Plan (Officiating and Coaching Lesson)
107
Criteria for the evaluation / assessment of a lesson – The Quality of coaching lesson may be evaluated /
assessed through the following points:
1. Preparation of a lesson plan.
2. Selection of suitable activity / skill/ topic etc.
3. Creativity
4. Marking of the area in case of activity or skill of coaching and officiating.
5. Appearance – dress-up, grooming etc.
6. Presentation, demonstration and explanation.
7. Use of formations, apparatus, whistle, officiating and coaching aids etc.
8. Position of the student teacher.
9. Command, voice and confidence, whistle, officiating and coaching.
10. Discipline and class control.
11. Class management.
12. Detection and correction of mistakes.
13. Safety precautions.
14. Overall impression.
15. Written / viva voce.
16. Professional attitude, and
17. Record Book
Reference
1. Williams Patrick and Diane S., “Becoming A Professional Coach”, (2007)Norton Publication
2. Sharma, N.P. “Officiating and Coaching in Sports”, (2005) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New Delhi.
3. Tandon, K. “Officiating and Coaching”, Published by Tandon Publication, Book Market, Ludhiana
(PB).
4. Rules Books approved by the respective Association/ Federation recognized by IOC/ IOA.
5. Singh, Yadwinder “Sports Officiating and Coaching”, (2005) Sports Publication, G-6,23/23B
EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
6. Marley, William, P., “Health and Physical Fitness: Taking Charge of Youth Health” First Edition
1982: Published by CBS College Publishing; 383 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 110017.
7. Singh, Hardayal, “Science of Sports Training” 1997: D.V.S. Publications, 100 T.K. Giri Nagar,
Kalkaji, New Delhi-110019.
8. FIBA Rules Book, New Edition
9. FIFA Rule Book, New Edition
10. FIVA Rule Book, New Edition
108
HEALTH, FITNESS AND GYM MANAGEMENT
Max. Marks : 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment : 20 Marks
Objectives:
1. To prepare professional gym managers for job/ self employment.
2. Importance of study of Health, Fitness and Gym Management.
3. To check health and fitness status of different sections / age groups of Gym Users.
4. Planning of gym compartments.
5. Development of all round fitness.
6. To provide knowledge of gym using.
7. Responsibilities of gym manager.
8. To provide knowledge about diet supplements.
9. To provide knowledge of development of cardio respiratory, strength, weight, control, weight loose,
weight gain, body building / best physique.
10. To provide knowledge about balance diet and dietary requirements for different purposes of gym
exercises.
Contents for Health, Fitness and Gym Management
1. Health and fitness check-up (Medical / Physical)
2. Exercise guidelines and precautions.
3. Endurance work out and equipment – aerobics, Agility exercises, Arm ergometry, Aqua aerobics,
aqua jogging, bicycling, flexibility exercises, plyometrics, rope jumping, rowing machine, running, star
stepping, vibratory, swimming, treadmill, versa climber, weight training/ strength training.
4. Basic principles of strength training.
5. Fundamentals of strength training : Technique, breathing, stabilizing, grips (types of grip) weight belts,
spotting, preparation, lowering, weights, range of motion, speed of execution.
6. Requirements for Effective Strength (Resistance) Training: Medical clearance, technique and posture,
and discipline.
7. Safety in weight Room Adding and removing weights, spotting, moving around the weight room, and
equipment storage.
8. Basic Safety Measures: Warm up Sets/ Cooling down (General warming up, specific warming-up and
cooling down), technique, bouncing, no pain no gain, protect the knees, protect back, etiquette,
equipment set-up, hand towel, and time on equipment.
9. Strength Training Exercises: Core exercises, structural exercises, power exercises, auxiliary
exercises.
10. Methods of Weight Training: Load / resistance (Training goal and load), Repetitions (Training goal and
load), Rest periods (Training goal and rest periods) and sets (Training goal and number of sets)
11. Exercise Programme: Weight Loss Cardio respiratory, strength training, physiotherapy unit, muscle
tone up, weight training, body building etc.)
12. Understanding flexibility benefits of stretching. Affects of aging on flexibility.
13. Major muscles of the body for training: Chest, upper arm, shoulders, upper back, thigh, abdominal,
forearms, lower back, hip and lower leg.
14. Designing Women-Strength Training origins and evolution; benefits of strength training for women
(increased strength, increased muscle mass and decreased body fat, increased bone density,
improve immune function, revised effects of aging, improved mood and increased confidence,
improved quality of life and stronger not bigger.
15. Body Building: The warm up and cool down: principles and basic laws of strength and body building
training, muscles and training for body building.
16. Cross-training and plyometrics.
17. Diet for various works out – endurance, strength, body building, weight loss and weight gain.
109
Evaluation Plan
1. Performance test.
2. Written / viva voce.
3. Professional attitude, and
4. Record Book.
Reference Books:
1. Anita Bean, “The Complete guide to Sports Nutrition: How to eat for maximum Performance”
Third Edition, (2000) published by A&C Black (Publishers) Ltd., 37 Soho Square, London WID 3QZ.
2. R. Kumar, Meenal Kumar and Ganguly, N.K. “Guide to Wellness and Well being”. First Edition,
(2004): Published by Deep & Deep publications Pvt. Ltd. F-159, Rajouri Garden, New Delhi –110027.
3. Thapar, GD “Hints on Health” First Edition, (2002) : Published by Rupa Company, 7/16, Ansari
Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi-110002.
4. Thomas, D. Fahley and Gayle Hutchinson, “Weight Training for Women” First Edition, (1992):
Published by Mayfield Publishing Company-1240 Villa Street, Mountain View, California,-94041.
5. William P. Marley, “Health and Physical Fitness: Taking Charge of Your Health” First Edition,
(1982): Published by CBS College Publishing; 383 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 110017.
6. Wayne Viljoen, “The Weight Training Handbook” First Edition, (2003): Published by New Holland
Publishers.
110
YOGA (One Asana of the choice of the students )
Max. Marks : 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20 Marks
Objectives
1. Importance of yoga and meditation in one’s life.
2. To develop efficiency in the conduct of yoga session and bring about technical expertise in
yogic / meditative exercises.
3. To prepare the student-teacher for teaching job related with yoga.
4. To provide practical experience to prepare effective teaching / training lesson plan for
meditative exercises / poses.
5. To familiarize the student teacher with different teaching techniques of yogic and yogic
exercises.
Contents of Yoga for Specialization
1. Meaning and concept of Yoga, historical back ground of Yoga.
2. Types of Yoga; a brief discussion.
3. Hatha Yoga; its meaning, concept and philosophy.
- Pranayama and its physiological value.
- Kumbhaka and its physiological value.
- Anulom and Viloma or Nadi Sodhan Pranayama.
- Uijayi, Bhastrika and Kapal Bhati.
- Surya Bhedana and its effects on nervous system.
- Sitali, Pavana, Muktsana and its effects on respiratory system.
4. Astanga Yoga and its description:
- Asanas; Padmasana, Siddhasana, Svastikasana, Samasana, Sukhasana, Yogamudra, Baddhakonasana,
Supta-Vajrasana, Ardha-Matsyendrasana, Vakrasana, Trikonasana, Halasana,
Paschimottasana, Ourtdhva pascimottasana, Padahastasana, Bhujangasana, Arodha-Bhujangasana,
Salbhasana, Ardha-Salbhasana, Dhanurasana, Jalandhara-Bandha, Jihva-Bandha, Mula Bandha,
Uddiyana-Bandha, Nauli, Viparitakarani, Sarvangasana, Ardha-Sarvangasana, Matsyasana,
Sirsasana, Savasana.
5. Asanas for concentration and mental stability:
- Vriksasana, Vatyanasana, Utthita Hasta Padangusthasana, Bakrasana, Utthita Padmasana,
Ekapada Angusthasana, Eka Hasta Bhujasana, Parvatasana,.
6. Medtation, Concentration, Nadis, Chakras and Kundalis; its meaning and concept.
7. Hygiene of Yoga; Neti, Dhauti, Basti, Nauli, Kapal-Bhati, Trataka, Kunja etc.
8. Bandas and Mudras; aim, objectives and benefits. Physiological aspects of various bandhas and
Mudras.
9. Therapeutic and corrective values of Pranayama and Asanas:
- Acidity, Allergy, Anemia, Arthiritis, Asthma, Cold, Constipati, Diabetes, Diarrhea, Exhaustion,
Headaches, Heart trouble, High Blood Pressure, Impotencuy, Indigestion, Low Blood Pressure,
Obesity, Paralysis, Sinus, Tuberculosis, Ulcer.
10. Yogic therapy for various psychological problems:
- Indecision, Haste, Nervousness, excessive touchiness, nightmares, disharmony, obsession,
melancholy, frustration.
11. Balance diet; its meaning and definition. Its importance for Yoga.
12. Classifications of various foodstuffs according to Yoga science.
111
Evaluation Plan
Criteria for the evaluation / assessment of a lesson – The quality of lesson plan may be evaluated / assessed
through the following points:
1. Preparation of a lesson plan.
2. Selection of suitable activity / skill / topic etc.
3. Creativity.
4. Marking of the area in case of activity or skill of coaching and officiating.
5. Appearance – dress up, grooming etc.
6. Presentation, demonstration and explanation.
7. Use of formations, apparatus, whistle, officiating and coaching aids etc.
8. Position of the student teacher.
9. Command, voice and confidence in officiating and coaching.
10. Discipline and class control.
11. Class management.
12. Detection and correction of mistakes.
13. Safety precautions.
14. Overall impressions.
15. Performance test.
16. Written / viva voce.
17. Professional attitude, and
18 Record Book.
Reference Books
1. Debnath, Monica “Basic Core Fitness through Yoga and Naturopathy” (2006-07) Sports Publication,
G-6,23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
2. Yogeswar, “Text Book of Yoga”,(2004) Penguin Books.
3. Harvey, Paul “Yoga for Everybody”, (2001)Tucker Slingsby Publisher Ltd.
4. Sharma, Lalita “All You Wanted to Know About Yoga”, (1991)Sterling Publisher Pvt. Ltd.
5. Sri Ananda, “The Complete Book of YOGA Harmony of Body and Mind” 1999; Published by
Orient Paperbacks, Madrasa Road, Kashmere Gate, New Delhi-110006.
6. Vijayendra Patap, “A Teacher’s Guide for Beginning Yoga” Ist Ed. Indian (1987) Published
by SKY Foundation 339 Fitzwater Street, Philadelphia, Pennusyvani, 19147 USA.
7. Mira Mehta, “How to Use Yoga” (2002) Published by Hermes House, Anness Publishing
Limited 89-89 Blackfriars Road, London.
8. Bhanot, T.R., “Know About Yoga” (1995) Published by Dreamland Publications, 4425, nai
Sarak, Delhi-110006.
9. Iyenger, B.K.S, “Light on Yoga” Great Britain (1982) George Allenand, Unwin,.
10. Pratap, Vijayendra; “A Teacher’s Guide for Beginning Yoga” Akash Prakashan, Preet Vihar
Marg, New Delhi.
11. Sharma, Lalita; “All you wanted to know about Yoga” (1999) Sterling Publishes Private
Limited.
12. Sharma, P.D. “Yoga, Yogasana and Pranayama for Health” (1984) Navneet Publications,
Pvt. Ltd. Ahmedabad,.
13. Swami Satyananda Saraswati, “Asana, Pranyama, Mudra, and Bandhas”.
14. Rasolinol Wddowson, “The Hoy of Yoga”.
15. B.K.S. lyengar, “The Illustrated Light of Yoga” (1982)Great Britain, George Allenand Unwin,.
16. James Hewitt, “Teach Yourself Meditation”.
112
Training for Life Guard and Water Sports
Max. Marks : 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment : 20 Marks
Objectives
1. Importance of life guard and water supports.
2. To technical knowledge regarding life saving drills.
3. To prepare the student-teacher for artificial respiration.
4. To provide practical experience to prepare student to meet any eventuality related with flood.
5. To prepare student for life guard’s job.
Contents for training for life guard for water sports.
1. Meaning of life saving.
2. Equipment required for life saving:
- Life Buoy with stand to hang (approx. 2 mtr. high).
- Life Guard chair (1.8 mtr to 2 mtr high)
- A long rope
- A long bamboo (about 3 mtr. long)
- Artificial resuscitation (respiration) with required directions.
- Life Jacket.
3. Rescue methods:
- Indirect method (using life buoy, rope, bamboo etc.)
- Direct method (direct approach through life guard, coach)
4. Holds and Carry methods:
- Holds
i. Front carry
ii. Release for double grip on one arm.
iii. Release for double grip on two arm.
iv. Release for front head hold
v. Release for rear head hold.
- Carry
i. Pool lift
ii. Fire man’s carry
iii. Saddle back carry
iv. One man drag
v. Two man carry
vi. Three man carry, Australian carry
5. Kiss of life or Mouth to mouth resuscitation (respiration).
6. Life guard duties.
Evaluation Plan
1. Performance Test.
2. Written / viva voce.
3. Professional attitude, and
4. Record Books.
Reference Books:
1. Life guard training: By Nancy R. Delong.
2. Survival swimming and life saving: By Margaret Jervis and Farber and Farber.
3. Life saving and water safety today: By Charles E. Silva.
The Bachelor of Physical Education (B.P.Ed) – A four Year Programme is meant for preparing
quality teacher in Physical Education for Secondary / Senior Secondary School.
OBJECTIVES:
This programme shall strive to achieve the following objectives:
General Objectives:
1. To enable teacher to understand the nature, purpose and philosophy of physical education
at secondary stage.
2. To prepare teachers of physical education with broader educational perspective.
3. To develop for potentialities and organizing physical education programmes and
activities.
4. To develop capacity to organized leisure and recreational activities.
5. To empower them to inspire their students to actively participate in physical and yogic
exercises.
6. To enable teachers to develop personality, character, willpower, democratic values and
positive games and sports.
7. To make teachers capable of imparting basic knowledge about health, hygiene and
nutrition
8. To develop skills and competencies to organized school and community games and
sports.
9. To cultivate the sprit of sportsmanship, mental and physical alertness, scientific temper
and optimism.
10. To promote mental health, power of self- decision and self control, correct judgment and
action emotional stability and equanimity, respect for others and acceptance of authority
and rules
11. To promote appreciation and interest for indigenous games , sports and yogic exercises
12. To create awareness about health and hygiene in the community.
Specific Objectives
1. To lay down a sound foundation for higher and advance studies in Physical Education in
India.
2. To produce quality teachers in physical education.
3. To prepare students for advance coaching Diplomas in disciplines – Athletics,
Gymnastics, Hockey, Swimming, Basketball, Football etc.
4. To fulfill the eligibility criteria of Foreign Universities to get admission in post graduate
courses abroad since it is a basic and global programme.
5. To generate employment in the fields of Health Fitness and Gym- Management,
Physiotherapy, Journalism, Aquatics and Yoga.
6. To provide opportunity to talented students to excel in sports and become outstanding
sports persons.
7. To promote mass participation in Physical Education activities (Games, Sports Displays
etc) through intra – mural and Extra- mural programmes.
4
TITLES OF THE SUBJECT FOR BACHELOR OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(B.P. Ed.) – FOUR YEAR PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMME
Session: 2010-2011
B.P. Ed. FIRST YEAR (THEORY) – PART A (Annexure-A)
1. English and Communication Skills (Paper-I).
2. Punjabi Compulsory / History and Culture of Punjab (Paper-II).
3. History of Physical Education (Paper-III).
4. Educational Psychology, Guidance and Counseling (Paper-IV).
5. Applied Anatomy and Physiology (Paper-V).
Note:
1. The subject of Environmental Studies shall be read as per the guidelines of the Panjab
University, Chandigarh.
2. B.P.Ed.-First Year--Scheme of study of Part-A & B is given in Annexure-A, followed by
syllabus for Part-A (Theory)
3. B.P. Ed. --First Year syllabus for Part –B (Activity --Skills & Prowess) is given in Annexure-I
at the end of the theory syllabus.
5
ANNEXURE – A (Pages)
Bachelor of Physical Education (B.P. Ed.) – Four Year Professional Programme Scheme of Study
Part-A & B.
B.P. Ed. — First Year
Part-A (Theory)
Paper Title of the Subjects with Code Credit Mark Internal
Assessment
Paper-I English and Communication Skills (ECS) 1 90 10
Paper-II Punjabi (C) PBI / History and Culture of
Punjab(HCP)
½ credit for
each subject
45 marks
for each
subject
5 marks for
each subject
Paper-III History of Physical Education (HPE) 1 90 10
Paper-IV Educational Psychology, Guidance and
Counselling (EPGC)
1 70+20*P 10
Paper-V Applied Anatomy and Physiology (AAP) 1 70+20*P 10
*Environment Education
-- -- --
*P-Stands for marks for practical component.
Part-B (Activity – Skills and Prowess)
Paper Contents of Games and Sports Credit Mark Internal
Assessment
Athletics Teaching of Fundamentals, Rules
and Regulations and Measurements
of Fields
1 80 20
Gymnastics -do- 1 60 15
Football -do- 1 60 15
Basketball -do- 1 60 15
Wrestling -do- 1 60 15
Boxing -do- 1 60 15
Weight Training, Wt.
Lifting, Power Lifting
and Best Physique
-do- 1 60 15
Swimming -do- 1 60 15
Judo -do- 1 60 15
Light Apparatus
Activity / Calisthenics
Set of Exercises –2 counts, 4
counts, 8 counts and 16 counts
1 80 20
NOTE: 1. To accommodate more inter-school and inter-college games in B.P.Ed.-Second Year, Swimming,
Gymnastics and Judo will be taught/completed in B.P. Ed.-First Year, w.e.f 2006-07.
2. Each student is required to pass separately in theory, practical and respective assessment.
3. Six hours per day will be devoted for theory and practice i.e. three hours for theory and three hours for
practice / practical work.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
*The compulsory subject of Environment Education would be offered by the students in the First Year of
Undergraduate Classes in all streams (Arts, Commerce, Science, Computer Application, Biotechnology,
Education etc.)
6
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-First Year
B.P. Ed. : First Year
Paper : I
Time : 3 Hrs.
ENGLISH --
COMMUNICATIONS SKILLS
(ECS)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90
Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Book Prescribed: Colours of Expression by Harbhajan Singh Published by Publication
Bureau, Panjab University, Chandigarh.
Section-A
Unit-I Text 30 marks
(1) Story:
One essay type question on Summary/Character/Incident
(one out of two with internal choice.) (10 marks)
(2) Prose:
Short questions to test student’s grasp (10 marks)
(3) Poetry:
Summary (one out of two with internal choice) (5 marks)
Paraphrase/Explanation of a Stanza (one out of two with internal choice) (5 marks)
Unit-II Language through Literature 20 marks
(i) Vocabulary/Match Columns/Pair of Words (12 marks)
(From Prose and Stories of the Text)
(ii) Synonyms and Antonyms (8 marks)
(8 out of 13 from the Text)
Section-B
Unit-III Grammar 20 marks
1. Tenses and Sequence of Tenses
2. Voice
3. Narration
4. Non-Finites (Infinitive, Gerund, Participle)
5. Determiners and Modals
6. Degrees of Comparison
Unit-IV Language-in-Use 20 marks
1. Letter-Writing (Personal and Applications) (10 marks)
2. Translation from English into M.I.L. (from text) (10 marks)
7
IMPORTANT INSTRUCTION FOR PAPER SETTER AND EXAMINER
Testing
UNIT-I
Questions to be set in ‘Do as directed’ form, 15 questions to be set and students will be required to
attempt any 10. Each question carries 2 marks.
UNIT-II
From Part-A: Three types of letters to be set and the students will attempt any one. Letter writing will
carry 15 marks.
From Part-B: Three questions to be set offering internal choice to the students and they will be
required to do one question carrying 10 marks.
UNIT-III
Part-A: Three questions with internal choice to be set. Students will attempt any one. The question
will carry 15 marks.
Part-B: Two questions with internal choice to be set. Students will attempt one. The question will
carry 10 marks.
UNIT-IV
From Prose and Story sections, two questions to be set offering internal choice. Students will
attempt any one question. The question will carry 10 marks.
From Poetry section, two questions (summary or theme) to be set offering internal choice. Students
will attempt one question. The question will carry 10 marks.
8
srIrk isiKA dI sn;tk iDgrI de c;r s;l; pRoFESnl pRogr;m tiht
pMj;bI l;JmI, pihle s;l lXI inrw;rt p;WkRm
bI>pI>aELD : pihl; B;g
pepr : II
sm" : itMn QMTe
pMj;bI l;JmI kuLl aMk : 50
sl;n; ilKt pRIiKA : 45
p;s hoN lXI
QLTo-QLT aMk : 18
QrelU mul"kN : 05
p;WkRm
iXk;XI-1
mer; ipMD – ig> guridt isMQ, s;iht pRk;sn, cMDIgxH (isrf dUj; B;g inbMw ‘jnm sme' dIA' rIt" to'
lE ke’ mrn sme' dIA' rIt"’ tLk)
iXk;XI-2
r;STrI ate aMtr-r;StrI msilA' ‘te leK rcn;
iXk;XI-3
pLtr-ivh;r – pLtr ate t;r (Telegram)
iXk;XI-4
ivh;rk iva;krn
iXk;XI-5
anuv;d
iXk;XI, qIm ate aMk" dI vMD
1. inbMw pustk ivco' pRSn-PuLtr – s;r ivS;, s;ihtk ate siBa;c;rk mul"kN ‘te aw;irt / (c;r ivco'
do) 7+7= 14 aMk
2. r;StrI ate aMtr-r;StrI msilA' ‘te leK rcn; (c;r ivco' do) 7 aMk
3. pLtr ate t;r (telegram) leKn 6 aMk
(c;r ivco' iXk)
4. ivh;rk iva;krn – suLw-asuLw Sbd, v;k, ivcr;m icMn ate muh;vre
2x6 = 12 aMk
5. vp;rk / pRofESnl iviga;pn d; aMgrejI to' pMj;bI ivc anuv;d
6 aMk
suZ;XIA' pustk"
k;lj pMj;bI iva;rkn – D;> hrkIrt isMQ, iG> l;l isMQ, pMj;b sTeT yUnIvrisTI TeksT buk
borD, cMDIgxH .
pMj;bI l;JmI, B;g pihl; lXI inrw;rt p;WkRm ‘te aw;irt pepr
sELT krn sbMwI jrUrI ihd;iXt"
9
kuLl aMk : 50
sl;n; ilKt pRIiKA lXI inrw;irt aMk : 45
p;s hoN lXI QLTe-QLT aMk : 18
QrelU mul"kN : 5
yuinT-1 (15 aMk)
pRSn-1
pustk ‘mer; ipMD’ de dUje B;g n;l sMbMiwt inbMw" (inbMw ‘jnm sme' dIA' rIt"’ to' lE ke inbMw
‘mrn sme' dIA' rsm"’ tk ) ivco' do tr" de pRsn puze j;N :
P) inrw;irt inbMw" de a;w;r ‘te pustk d; ivs; j" s;ihtk, siBa;c;rk mul"kN (do co' iXk) 8 aMk .
a) ikse iXk inbMw d; s;r, ivs; j" mul"kN (do ‘co' iXk) 7 aMk .
yuinT-2 (7 aMk)
pRSn-2
r;StrI ate aMtr-r;STrI msilA' ‘te leK ilKN lXI ikh; j;ve .
(do ‘co' iXk) 7 aMk
yuinT-3 (5 aMk)
pRSn-3
do ivSe aMikt kr ke ikse iXk ‘te pLtr ilKN lXI ikh; j;ve .
ate
do ivse aMikt kr ke ikse iXk ‘te t;r (Telegram) ilKN lXI ikh; j;ve .
noT: iXs yUinT ivco' c;r pRsn puLz ke pRIiKArqIA' lXI dohrI ivklp coN rLKI j;ve B;v pRIiKArqI
nUM pLtr j" t;r ivco' koXI iXk ivklp cuN skN dI vI KuLLl hove ate cuNe gXe ivklp ivc pR;pt do
iviSa" ivco' ikse iXk Pupr ilKN dI vI KuLl hove .
(c;r ‘co' iXk) 5 aMk
yuinT-4 (8 aMk)
pRSn-4
p;WkRm ivc inrw;irt ivh;rk iva;krn de c;r B;g hn . hr B;g de do-do aMk inrw;irt kr ke sv;l puze j;N:
P) do asuLw Sbd ilK ke Pun" d; suLw rUp ilKN lXI ikh; j;ve . (2 aMk)
a) do asuLw v;k ilK ke Pun" d; suLw rUp ilKN lXI ikh; j;ve . (2 aMk)
X) iXk pMktI / v;k (ibn" ivSr;m icMn" de) ilK ke ivsr;m icMnH lg;PuN d; inrdes idLt; j;ve .
(2 aMk)
10
s) itMn ivco' do muh;virA' de arq dLs ke v;k bN;PuN lXI ikh; j;ve . (2 aMk)
yuinT-5 (5 aMk)
pRSn-5
vp;rk j" pRofESnl iviga;pn d; aMgrejI to' pMj;bI ivc anuv;d krn lXI ikh; j;ve .
noT: anuv;d lXI idLt; j;N v;l; iviga;pn 2 j" 3 pMktIA' to' vLw nhI hoN; c;hId; .
(5 aMk)
11
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-First Year
B.P. Ed. : Ist Year
Paper : II
Time : 3 Hrs.
HISTORY AND CULTURE
OF PUNAJB (HCP)
Max. Marks : 50
Theory / Written : 45
Pass Marks : 18
Internal Assessment : 05
NOTE :
1. The candidates are required to attempt five questions out of nine.
2. First question is compulsory, it carries 9 marks and it will consist of nine short-answer type questions. The
candidate is required to attempt all the nine questions.
3. All questions carry equal marks.
UNIT –I
1. Society in the Punjab during the Afghan rule.
2. The Punjab under the Great Mughals.
3. Salient feature of the Bhakti movement and Sufism in the Punjab.
4.
UNIT –II
5. Guru Nanak : His teachings; concept of Langar and Sangat.
6. development of Sikhism (1539-11581): contributions of Guru Angad Dev, Guru Amar Das
and Guru Ram Das for the Development of Sikhism.
7. Transformation of Sikhism : Compilation of Adi-Granth ; martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev;
Guru Hargobind’s New Policy.
UNIT –III
8. Martyrdom of Guru Tegh Bahadur; foundation of the khalsa by Guru Gobind Singh.
9. Banda Bahadur and his achievements; Sikh struggle for sovereignty from 1716 to 1765; role
of dal khalsa, Rakhi, Gurmata and Misis.
10. Ranjit Singh’s rise to power; civil and military administration ; relations with the British.
UNIT –IV
11. Social change with special reference to the position of Women.
12. New development in language, literature, architecture in the Punjab during the Medieval
period.
13. Famous Folk tales of medieval Punjab.
Suggested Readings:
1. Singh, Kripal, History and culture of the Punjab, Part II (Medieyal Period).Publications
Bureau, Punjabi university, Patiala, 1990 (3rd edn.).N.B.: The required details and depth
would conform to the treatment of the subject in the above survey (This Book will also
from the basis of the short answer questions).
2. Grewal, J.S., The Sikhs of Punjab, The New Cambridge University History of India,
Orient longamn, Hyderabad, 1990.
3. Singh Khuswant, A History of the Sikhs, Vol. I: 1469- 1839, Oxford University Press
Delhi, 1991.
4. Singh fauja (ed)., History of the Punjab, Vol.III Punjabi University, Patiala, 1972.
12
5. Chopra, P. N., Puri, B.N., and Das, M.N., A social, cultural & economic History of India,
Vol.II, Macmillian, Delhi, 1974.
6. L.M. Johsi (ed.), History and Culture of Punjab, Part-I, Publication Bureau, Punjabi
University, Patiala, 1989 (3rd edn.) N.B. The required detail and depth would conform to
the treatment of the subject in the above survey (This book will also form the bases of the
short answer questions).
7. L.M. Joshi and Fauja Singh (edn.) History and Culture of Punjab, Vol. I, Punjabi
University, Patiala, 1977.
13
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-First Year
B.P. Ed. : 1st Year
Paper : III
Time : 3 Hrs.
HISTORY OF
PHYSICAL EDUCTION
(HPE)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 90
Minimum Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread
over the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal
choice i.e. the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in first
Question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Physical Education in Ancient India; Vedic Period, Epic Period, Buddhist Period, Rajput Period, Mughal Period
and British Period.
• Physical Education Institution of India: YMCA Madras, LNIPE Gwalior, Christian College of Physical
Education, Lucknow, HVPM Amaravati, G.C.P.E. Patiala.
• Sports Institutions of India, N.S.N.I.S. Patiala, S.A.I.
• Contribution of Indian and foreign leaders in the field of physical education and sports.
India: Sh. H.C. Buck, Prof. D.G. Wakharkar, Dr. P.M. Joseph, Dr. J.P. Thomas, Prof S.R. Mahindroo, Prof.
Karan Singh and Prof. Ajmer Singh.
Abroad: J.F. Gutts Muth, Per Herni Ling, Dioo Levis, John Baseer.
Unit-III Physical Education in the City States of Greece
Sparta
• Physical Education in Sparta
• The aim of Physical education in Sparta.
• Women in Sparta.
Athens
• Education at Athens
• Palaestra, gymnasium, the Ephebos.
• Physical Education and Sports in Rome.
• The Public Games: The Circus Maximus, the Colosseum, Sham Naval Battles, and the Gladiatorial Combats.
Unit-IV
Physical Education in India after Independence:
14
• Contribution of Akhadas and Vyayamshalas.
• The British influence of Gymkhana, Sports Club, and Physical-Training.
• Association of Indian Universities (AIU)-its role in the development and promotion of games and sports in the
affiliated Universities and Colleges of the country.
• Raj Kumari Amrit Kaur Coaching Scheme (1953).
• Central Advisory Board of Physical Education and Recreation (1954).
• National Plan of Physical Education and Recreation- 1956.
• National Discipline Scheme (NDS) – 1954.
• Adhoc Enquiry Committee - 1958.
• Kaul Kapoor Committee.
• All India Council of Sports – 1954.
• National Physical Fitness Programme – 1959.
• National Fitness Corps – 1959.
• National Sports Organisation / Association.
• Recommendation of Education Commission (Kothari Commission) 1964-66.
• Youth Welfare Programme.
• National Sports Awards :(Rajiv Khel Ratna Award, Arjuna Award, Dronacharya Award, Dhyan Chand Award and
Maulana Abul Kalam Azad Trophy).
Unit – V
• Ancient Olympic Games.
• Modern Olympic Games; and India.
• Asian Games; and India
• Commonwealth Games; and India
• Afro Asian Games; and India
• S.A.F. Games; and India
• National School Games and SGFI
• National Games.
Books Recommended
• Don Marrow, “Sports History” (2006) Human Kinetic Publisher inc.
• Lal, D.C. “History of Physical Education and Sports”(2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Mishra, Sharad “Reading in Physical Education and Sports”(2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B
EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Tirunaryanan & S. Harisharasarma, (1998) “An Analytical History of Physical Education”.
• Eraz Ahmed Khan, “History of Physical Education” (1964)
15
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-First Year
B.P. Ed. : Ist Year
Paper : IV
Time : 3 Hrs.
EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY,
GUIDANCE AND COUSELLING
(EPGC)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will carry
two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in respective
four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory.
UNIT-II PSYCHOLOGY AND EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY.
• Meaning, Definition, Nature and Scope of Psychology
• Meaning, Definition, Nature and Scope of Educational Psychology.
• Importance of Educational Psychology for the teacher.
• Historical Development of Educational Psychology.
• Psychology and its usefulness in the field of Physical Education.
• Methods of studying human behaviour: Introspection, observation method, experimental method, clinical and
case study methods.
UNIT-III GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT
• Meaning of growth and development.
• Nature of growth and development.
• Characteristics or principles of growth and development.
• Distinction between growth and development.
• Stages of growth and development.
• Physical, mental, emotional and social development during childhood.
• Principles of growth and development and their educational implications.
• Factors affecting growth and development – Heredity and Environment.
• Psychological and physical problems of an adolescent and the role of physical education and sports in solving
the problems.
ADOLESCENCE EDUCATION
Adolescence Education- Meaning, objectives; need for adolescence education and the role of the institution in
adolescence education. Skill development in adolescence education – Adolescence Reproductive and Sexual Health
(ARSH) Skills and skills for the teachers.
Unit-IV LEARNING
• Learning: Meaning, definition and Nature of learning.
16
• Factors affecting learning. Principles of learning.
• Laws and associated laws of learning given by Thorndike.
• Individual differences: Meaning, Definitions and Areas.
o Determinants and their roles in generating individual differences.
o Educational implications and provisions for individual differences in the educational institutions.
o
TRANSFER OF TRAINING
• Transfer of training: Meaning and definitions.
• Theories of transfer of training: Theory of mental discipline (Faculty Theory), Appreciation theory of Transfer
training, Theory of identical elements, theory of generalization, transposition theory of transfer training and
theory of ideals.
• Factors affecting transfer of training.
• Educational implication of transfer of training.
UNIT-V GUIDANCE AND COUNSELING
• Meaning and concept of guidance.
• Purpose and need of guidance programmes.
• Organisation of the guidance progrmame in schools.
• Meaning, Definition and types of counseling.
• Characteristics or qualities of an effective counselor.
• Principles of counseling, duties and functions of counseling.
Practical Part
The students under the supervision of a teacher will practice Introspection/Observation Methods of study of
human behaviour. Also practical sessions shall be arranged to provide experience of guidance and counseling
practices/services.
Books Recommended
• Singh Jeet and Vaid, Rajesh, “Physical Education and Sports Psychology” (2007)Sports Publication,
G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Gangopadhya, S. R. “Sports Psychology”, (2007) Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• K. K. Bhatia and et al, “Advance Educational Psychology of Teaching” Learning Process” (2005)
• Mangal S.K. “Advance Educational Psychology” (2004)
• Dweey John, “Psychology”(1998) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New Delhi 1998
• Mathur, S.S. “Educational Psychology” (1994)Vinod Pustak Mandir Agra.
17
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-First Year
B.P. Ed. : 1stYear
Paper : V
Time : 3 Hrs.
APPLIED ANATOMY
AND
PHYSIOLOGY
(AAP)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will carry
two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• An introduction to the anatomy and physiology of human body - levels of structural complexity within the body
(cells tissues, organs and systems).
• Meaning of Internal and External Environment.
• The structure and functions of the cell.
• A brief introduction to the human skeleton.
• Axial Skeleton – the skull, vertebral column, ribs and sternum.
• Appendicular Skeleton – The shoulder girdle with the upper limbs and the pelvic girdle with the lower limbs.
• Bone: Bone structure, types of bones (long bones, short bones, irregular bones and seasmoid bones), and
functions of bones.
• Definition of a joint. Types of joint (fibrous or fixed joints, cartilaginous or slightly movable and freely movable or
Synovial joints).
• Structural classification of muscles (skeletal, smooth and cardiac muscles and general characteristics of muscles
– elasticity, contractility and irritability).
Unit – III
• A brief introduction to the human nervous system.
• Structure and functions of the brain, spinal cord, and peripheral nervous system brain – cerebrum, midbrain,
pons, medulla oblongata, cerebellum; spinal cord - sensory nerves (afferent or ascending), motor nerve (efferent
or descending) and simple reflex arc; and peripheral nervous system.
• Autonomic nervous system.
• Sympathetic nervous system.
• Parasympathetic nervous system.
• Brief introduction to the endocrine system. Types, location, secretion and functions of glands; pituitary gland,
thyroid gland, parathyroid glands, adrenal gland, and hypothalamus, the pancreatic islets, pineal gland or body,
thymus gland, ovaries in the female and testes is in the male.
Unit – IV
• The blood: The structure, function and formation of blood cells; blood groups and their characteristics; and the
process of blood clotting and its regulation.
• The cardio-vascular system: The structure and functions of heart and major blood vessels of the body.
• Brief description of circulation of the blood, pulmonary circulation, systemic or general circulation, and portal
circulation.
18
Unit – V
• Brief introduction of the respiratory system: its organs structure and functions. Mechanism, control and types of
respiration.
• Brief introduction of the digestive system: its organs structure and functions. The process of digestion (ingestion,
propulsion, digestion, absorption and elimination).
• Secretion: juices and their functions.
PRACTICAL PART:-
• Identification of the bones of lower & upper limbs.
• Identification of the bones of torso.
• Identification of various joints of the body.
• Anthropometry kit, anthropometric measurements and their uses.
• Blood pressure and heart rate measurement techniques.
Books Recommended:-
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Gerard J Tortora and Bryan Derrickson, “Principles of Anatomy and Physiology” (2006)11th edition –
John Willy and Sons,inc. USA.
• Albert Bluisdall, “Human Anatomy and Physiology”(2001) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Rose and Wilson , “Anatomy and Physiology in Health Illness” (2001) 9th edition- Harcourt Publisher
Ltd.
• Winwood, R.S. and Smith, J. L. “Sears Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses” (1998)6th edition ( 1st
Indian edition)
• Gray A. Thibodean and Kelvin T. Patton, “Anthony’s Textbooks of Anatomy and Physiology” (1994)
14th edition Mosby year book inc. St. Louis Times Mirror, Mosby College Publishing
19
ANNEURE- I (Pages)
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
ATHLETICS (Track and Field) for Men and Women
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of athletics (Track and Field) for men and women including important
competitions and personalities of national and international repute.
2. Introduction of the event and its historical development with special reference to India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the sport/event.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of each event.
6. Importance of hygiene for an athlete.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Track Events
Sprinting Events
(a) Correct running style emphasizing on proper body position.
(b) Crouch start and its variations - fixing of the starting blocks, getting off the
block.
(c) Practice of starts with blocks using proper and different commands.
(d) Finishing techniques – Run Through, Forward Lunge and Shoulder Shrug.
(e) Rules& regulation of sprinting event.
Middle and Long Distance Running Events including Walking Events and Marathon Race
(a) Practice of standing start.
(b) Correct running style- emphasizing on proper body position and foot
placement.
(c) Proper arm & leg action.
(d) Running tactics.
(e) Rules & regulations.
Field Events
Long Jump
(a) Techniques:-Hang and Running in the Air Techniques.
(b) Teaching Stages: Approach run, take off, flying phase and landing.
(c ) Measurement of Long Jump Arena.
(d) Rules &Regulations for Competition.
Triple Jump
(a) Teaching Stages: Approach run, take off and landing for hop, step & jump,
Flying phase and landing
(b) Measurement of Triple Jump Arena
(c) Rules &Regulations for Competition
Evaluation Plan(Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
20
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
1. Brown L. Richard, “Fitness Running.” (2003)Human Kinetics USA.
2. Singh, Baljeet “Athletic Conditioniong.” (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
3. Novich,M.Max “Training and Conditioning of Athletes”,Lea & Febiger 600S. Washington square
Philadelphia,PA 19106 U.S.A.
4. Bosen,Ken O. “Track and Field Fundamental Techniques”, Patiala: N.I.S. Publication.
5. Dyson, Geoffrey HG, Edumndson, Joseph, “Athletics for Schools.” University of London
Press Ltd. 1969.
6. Doherty, J. Mannet, “Track and Field” Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice Hall Inc.
7. Dyoon, Geoffrey, G.H. The Mechanic of Athletics London University of London press
Ltd.,1962
8. Hodks, Gens.Application of Weight Training to Athletics. Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice
Hall Inc., 1962
9. Malhotra, Ashok Kumar A Guide to be an Athlete, Krishna Publication Books New Delhi.
10. Mohan, V.M. Athletics for beginners, Metropolitan Books New Delhi.
21
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
GYMNASTICS (Men and Women)
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Gymnastics for men and women including important competitions and
personalities of national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the game/sport.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of each event/item of gymnastics.
6. Importance of hygiene for a gymnast.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
MEN SECTION
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Developmental exercises
Exercises on wall bars, exercises on heavy beam, rope climbing, exercises
with medicine ball, pyramid formations and stunts.
Floor Exercises
Forward roll, backward roll, sideward roll, cart wheel, hand stand and forward
roll, backward roll to hand stand, Diving forward roll, side split, head stand, different kind of
scale, dive roll from best board and round off.
Parallel Bars
Mount from one bar, straddle walking on parallel bars, single and double step walk,
perfect swing, shoulder stand on one bar roll forward, roll side, shoulder stand and front on
back vault to the side(dismount).
Vaulting Table
Approach run and jump from the beat board, cat vault, squat vault and straddle
vault.
Horizontal Bars
Perfect swing on horizontal bars, single leg up start with swing, mill circle
forward, and mill circle backward.
Pommel horse
Perfect support position on pommel horse, single leg outward (front
support),single leg circle inward (front support) and half single leg circle.
Roman Rings
Perfect swing on roman rings, inverted hand stand and indicate forward with body
bent and straight.
Note : Roman ring will be taught, if facilities are available.
22
WOMEN SECTION
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Floor Exercise
Rolls-forward and backward, hand stand and roll forward, cartwheel and cat
leap.
Uneven Bars
Long higher bar to squat forward to rear support, swan, one leg squat rise to
scale and under wing dismount.
Beam
Jump to squat stand, knee scale with support, walk on the beam, standing
scale front ways and cat leap.
Vaulting
Squat vault.
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
1. Chakraborty, S “ Activities for Children Teaching Gymnastics Piramids” (2006-07) Sports
Publication, G-6,23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi. Stunrt, Nik.”
2. Competitive Gymnastics,” London:Paul and Company, Ltd.1970.
3. De Carle, Tom.., “Hand Book of Progressive Gymnastics.” Englewood Cliffs: N.J.Printice
Hall,1963.
4. Lokon,Newtwan,C. Wiliougbby.Rodert, J.” Complete Book of Gymnastics.” Englewood
Cliffs,N.J.Printice Hall, 1954.
5. Cochranu, Tunvi. S.”International Gymnastics for Girls and Women.”London: Addison Willy
Publishing Company.
6. Drury, Blanchu, J. and Schmid Andore B. ,” Gymnastics for Women.”California: National
Book, 1970.
6. Rules Book of Gymnastics Federation of India, Latest Edition.
23
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
FOOTBALL
Max.Marks:75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15 Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of football including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of
national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the game/sport.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a football player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Kicks:
Kicking with the inside of the foot.
Kicking with the instep of the foot.
Kicking with the outer instep of the foot.
Lofted kick.
Trapping:
Trapping rolling ball – with the inside, sole and instep of the foot.
Trapping bouncing ball with the sole.
Dribbling:
With the instep of the foot.
With the inside of the foot.
With the outer instep of the foot.
Heading:
From standing, running and jumping.
Throw-in
Feinting:
With the lower limb and with the upper part of the body.
Tackling :
Simple and slide tackling.
Goal Keeping :
Collection of balls.
Ball clearance – Kicking, throwing and deflecting.
Elementary formations and systems of play.
Functional training.
Lead up games/ side games.
24
ADVANCE SKILLS
Kicking :
Chip, in-swing and out-swing.
Volley (low drive, back volley and scissors volley).
Half volley.
Ball Reception and Control:
Receiving the rolling ball with inside and out side of the foot and changing direction.
Trapping the bowing ball with the abdomen.
Trapping the bowing ball with the lower leg.
Receiving the bowing ball with the inside and outside of the foot and changing the direction.
Receiving the flying ball with the inside, instep thigh, chest and head.
Dribbling:
Controlled dribbling, fast dribbling, straight dribbling, zigzag dribbling and dribbling
around/between obstacles.
Heading:
From running and jumping, heading for long distance and downward heading.
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Buxton. Ted, “Football Skills for Young Players”(2003)Angus Books Limited.
K.Kanika, “Football Coaching Manual” (2005)Sports Publications H.O: 7/26, Ansari Road ,Darya Ganj,New
Dehli.
Batty Cris,”Soccer Coaching the Modern way.” London; Faber and Faber,1969.
Hatty Lein ,”Soccer Coaching :The Modern Way.”London; Faber andFfaber ,1969.
Hedler and Stranghton,”Play Football with Pele.” London Tronoto,Sydney.
Larche,Harry, E.,”Techniques of Football Coaching.” London;A.S.Barnes &
Company,1969.
Lonziak Conrad,”Understanding Soccer Tactics.” London; Faber and Faber, 1966.
Soundrer’s Tom,”Play Better Soccer in all Colour.”London; Colling Geaegow,1972.
Singh,Gian,”Football Quiz.” Delhi; Services Publishing House,1977.
25
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
BASKETBALL
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Basketball including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the game/sport.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a basketball player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Player/s Stance and Ball Holding.
Passing and Receiving :
Two hand chest pass,
Two hand bounce pass,
One hand base ball pass,
Side arm pass.
Over head pass,
Hook pass.
Receiving :
Two hand receiving,
One hand receiving,
Receiving in stationery position,
Receiving while running,
Receiving while jumping.
Receiving :
Start and stop dribbling,
High and low dribbling,
Reverse dribbling,
Rolling dribbling.
Shooting :
Lay-up shot and its variations,
One hand set shot,
One hand jump shot,
Hook shot,
Free throw.
26
Rebounding:
Defensive rebound,
Offensive rebound,
Knock out,
Rebound organization.
Individual Defense:
Guarding the man without the ball,
Guarding the man with the ball.
Pivoting
Systems of play (defense & attack)
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Vaidhya, Rajesh “Skills & Tactics Basketball, (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Rose.H.Lee, “The Basketball Handbook.” (2004) Human kinetics, USA.
Boe, Clair and Norton, Kon,”Men to Men Defense and Attack.” (1959) New York: Ronald Press Company.
Boe, Clair and Norton, Kon, ”Zone Defense and Attack.” (1959)New York: Ronald Press Company.
Colberk, A.L.,” Modern Basketball – A Fundamental Analysis of Skills and Tacticts.”(1956) London.
Nicholas Kaya.
Moontasir, Abbas, “Principles of Basketball.” (1979)Bombay Skanda Publication.
Srivatsan s., ”Basketball.”NIS,Publication,Patiala.
27
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
WEIGHT TRAINING,WT. LIFTING, POWER LIFTING AND BEST PHYSIQUE
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Weight Lifting, Power Lifting and Best Physique including important tournaments and
distinguish personalities of national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the game/sport.
4. Differences among weight training, weight lifting and power lifting.
5. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
6. Safety principles of weight training and introduction of the muscular system of the body.
7. International rules and regulations of the game.
8. Importance of hygiene for a weightlifter.
9. Etiquette.
10. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Weight Training Exercises (Iso tonic, Iso-metric, Iso-kinetic, Plyo-metrics, Pulley and
Multiple Machine Exercises):-
Two arms curl; Front press;
Press behind the neck; Dead lift;
Quarter, half and full squats;
Rise on Toes (heel raising);
Straight arm pull over; Bent over; Rowing;
Bench press; Leg press; Wrist rolling;
Pronation and Supination; Trunk twisting;
Good morning exercise; Sit-ups with weight;
Alternate press; Spot running with weight;
Stepping on bench/stairs; Jack knife; lateral rise;
Iron shoes, Ankle weight, Wrist weight and Weight jacket exercises.
Exercises with wall bars,
Exercises with vaulting box,
Exercises with medicine ball,
Exercises with pulley, and
Exercises with multiple machines.
NOTE:-Students should be exposed to different sets of weight training exercises required in different
games and sports.
WEIGHT LIFTING :
Stages of two hand skills, two hands half and complete jerks from chest, and two hand snatch.
Two hands clean in half squat, in deep squat and in split squat.
Snatch with split style and squat style.
POWER LIFTING:
BEST PHYSIQUE:
Evaluation Plan
28
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Shanker, Ajay “Bodybuilding-A Beginner’ Approach.” (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Katyal, P.N.,” Manual of Weight Lifting.” Ambala Cantt. Green Printing Press.
Krikley, George W. Modern Weight lifting.” (1957)Load Faber Popular Books.
Krikley, George and Geodhody John.”The Manual of Weight training.”()1971 London Stanley Paul and
Company.
Murray,Jim and Karpovich Peter V.” Weight Training in Athletics.” (1965)Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Printice
Hall.
29
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
WRESTLING
Objectives:-
1. History Wrestling including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the game/sport.
4. Different kinds of wrestling.
5. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
6. International rules and regulations of the game.
7. Importance of hygiene for a wrestler.
8. Etiquette.
9. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Learning and demonstrating fundamental skills involving drills and lead up games related with the style of
wrestling:
Take downs: leg tackles and arm drag.
Counters for take downs: Cross face and whizzer series.
Escapes from under: Sit out-turns in tripped.
Counters for escapes from under: Basic control, back drop and counters for stand up.
Pinning combination: Nelson series( half Nelson, half nelson and bar arm) leg lift series, leg
cradle series, reverse double bar arm, chicken wing and half nelson.
Escapes from pinning: Wing lock series, double arm lock, roll and bridge.
Standing wrestling; Head under arm series and whizzer series.
Evaluation Plan: Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Clanger, E.L. & Dex Perry,”Wrestling.” A.S. Barus 7 Co. New York.
Dubey, C.H.,” A Wrestling Guide.” 201 Rampura, Saggar(M.P.)
U.S. Naval Institute,”Wrestling.”Arnapolis Manyala USA.
30
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
SWIMMING
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Swimming including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required in the sport.
4. Different kinds of Aquatics activities.
5. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
6. Glossary of terms used in swimming.
7. International rules and regulations of the game.
8. Safety and sanitary rules of Swimming pool.
9. Common water borne diseases, their causes and preventive measures.
10. Importance of hygiene for an athlete.
11. Etiquette.
12. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Entry into the swimming pool
Development of water balance and confidence:
Water- fear removing drills, Floating-mushroom and jelly-fish etc. and gliding with
and without kickboard.
Teaching of competitive swimming strokes (Free style, breast stroke, back stroke and butterfly etc.):
Body position, leg, kick, arm pull, breathing and co-ordination.
Starts and turns of the concerned strokes.
Individual medley; relays and relay tactics.
Water treading and simple jumping.
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Stud
Shrivastava, A.K. “Encyclopaedia of Sports” (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya
Ganj New Delhi.
Shrivastava, A.K. “How to Coach Swimming” (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road,
Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Counsilmen, James E.,” Science of Swimming.” London: Pelham Books.
Fair Banks and Annee Ross,” Teaching Spring Board Diving.” Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall Inc.N.J. 1963.
Gallagher Harry,” Swimming.” London: Pelham Books, 1970.
Harlen, Bruce,”How to Improve Your Diving.” Poona Modern Book Stall.
Helen Elkington,”Swimming: A HAND Book for Teacher.” Cambridge University Press.
Reckhan, George,”Diving Complete.” London: Faber and Faber Ltd.
31
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
BOXING
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15 Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Boxing including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national and
international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Different kinds of Boxing.
4. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
5. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
6. International rules and regulations of the game.
7. Importance of hygiene for a boxer.
8. Etiquette.
9. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS (Classification of Offensive and Defensive Actions):
Offensive Actions/Attacks: Direct and Counter Attacks.
Types of Punches(Six types of blows /punches):- Straight Left to the Face; Straight Right to the
Face; Straight Left to the Body; Straight Right to the Body; Left and Right Hooks; and
Left and Right Upper-cut.
Defense Actions (Two types):
Active defense.
Passive defense.
Four Groups of Defense (Blocking; Parries; Avading Movements; and Evading Movements):-
Blocking:-Head Block; Shoulder Block; Elbow block; and Double block.
Parries:- Left and right side parries; Inside parry; Outside parry; and Upward
Parry.
Avading Movements: Ducking; Weaving; and Slip left and right side.
Evading Movements: Step back; Sway back; Left side step; and Right side step.
Weak Points of the Boxer : Temporal, Centre of Moustache, Chin, Jugular vein, Flatting ribs,
Stomach.
Evaluation Plan :Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recomended
Shrivastava, A.K. “How to Coach Boxing” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road,
Darya Ganj New Delhi.
32
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
JUDO
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Judo including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national and
international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a judoka.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Rej (Saluation) :
Ritsurei (Saluation in standing postion).
Zarai (Saluation in sitting postion)
How to wear judo costume.
Kuma kata(Methods of holding judo costume.
Shisei(Posture in judo)
Kuzushi( Act of disturbing the opponent’s posture)
Tsukuriand kake(Preparatory action for attack)
Ukemi( Break fall ):
Urhiro Ukemi(Rear break fall).
Yoko Ukemi( Side break fall).
Mae Ukemi( Front break fall).
Mae Mawari Ukemi( Front rolling break fall).
Shin Tai(Advance or retreat of foot):
Suri-ashi (Gliding foot).
Tsugi-ashi (Following foot steps).
Ayumi-ashi (Drawing ankle throw).
Tai-Sabaki (Management of the body)
33
Nage-Waze (Throwing Technique):
Hiza Guruma (Knee-wheel).
Sesae Tsurikomi-ashi (Drawing ankle throw).
De-ashi Hari (Advance foot sweep).
O-goshi( Major Lion).
Seoi-nage (Shoulder throw).
Katama-waze (Grappling Technique):
Kesa-gatama (Scaff hold).
Kata Gatama( Shoulder hold).
Kami-shiho gatama (Locking of upper four quarters).
Methods of escaping from each hold.
Lead-up Games:
Break-fall relay(Maximum number of falls from standing position in one minute
duration).
Maximum number of shoulder throws in one minute.
Maximum number of obstacles jumped while doing Mae –mawri-ukemi relay
(Maximum number of falls in one minute duration).
Evaluation Plan ; (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Book Recomended
Kumar, Mukesh “Judo” (2006-07) Judo Federation of Asia
Aora, Monica “ Judo Coaching Manual (2005) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road,
Darya Ganj New Delhi.
34
B.PEd.-FIRST YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
Light Apparatus/ Calisthenics
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Indigenous Activities (Lezium, Lathies, Hoops, Malkham, Indian Clubs, Dumbles,
Drum, Different Formations – Pyramids, Bhartyam, Aerobics, etc. and its historical development with
special reference to India.
2. To prepare the students for demonstrations/displays on international, national or important days of
the institution.
3. Knowledge of equipment required for different indigenous activities.
4. To teach Free Hand Exercises emphasizing on physical fitness, rhythmic sense and neuromuscular
co-ordination.
5. To teach and provide organized physical education activities emphasizing on skill learning,
leadership, orderly behaviour and enjoyment.
6. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
7. To wear appropriate dresses.
8. Etiquette.
9. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS– With and without apparatus:
Commands (English and Hindi words that are commonly used in physical education)
Fall-in a single line, attention, stand- at- ease, stand easy, eyes right, eyes
front, (dressing), open and close order march, right turn, left turn about
turn and mark time.
Marching:-
Quick march and halt, wheeling (left /right), turning while marching and time mark,
marching with salute.
Free Hand Exercises (Exercises without Apparatus):-
Set of Exercises – Two Counts, Four Counts, Eight Counts, Sixteen Counts and
Reverse Count Exercises – These exercises may be carried out with or without
drum.
Apparatus Exercise (Dumbbell, Indian club – rigid and swing exercises, Wands, Hoops,
Lazium, Malkham, Lathies, etc.):-Set of exercises will be the same as of exercises
without apparatus/ free hand exercises.
Different Formations: - Initial Order Formation, Open Order Formation, Semi-circular
Formation, Plus Formation, Letter Formation, Sun Formation, Star Formation,
Pyramid Formation, Arrow Formation, India Word Formation, Olympic Ring
Formation, India Map Formation, India Flag Formation, etc.
Minor Games:-At least 50 minor games to be taught at the end of the Period for 10-12
minutes.
Evaluation Plan: ( Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test,
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
35
Books Recommended For Study
Datta,A.K.,and Mazumdar, I.,”Students Teaching in Physical Education.”2004, Janvani
Prakshan(P)Ltd.30/35, Gali No. 9, Vishwas Nagar, Shahdra, Delhi-110032.
Govt. of India Publication,” The Fitness Corps.”
”Hand Book of Physical Education.”(1995),Friends Publication(India),6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee
Nagar-Delhi.
36
TITLES OF THE SUBJECT FOR BACHELOR OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(B.P. Ed.) – FOUR YEAR PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMME
B.P. Ed. SECOND YEAR (THEORY) – PART- A (Annexure-B)
1. English- Communication Skills (Paper-VII)
2. Foundation of Physical Education (Paper-VIII)
3. Educational Methodology (Paper-IX).
4. Sports Psychology (Paper-X)
5. Recreation, Play, Camping and Leadership Training (Paper-XI).
6. Teaching Methodology in Physical Education (Paper-XII)
7. Physiology of Exercise (Paper-XIII).
Note:
1. The scheme of study of Part A, B, & C is given in Annexure-B, followed by syllabus of Part-A
(Theory)
2. Syllabus for Part-B (Activity-Skills & Prowess) and Part-C (Teaching Practice) are given in
Annexure-II at the end of the theory syllabus.
37
ANNEXURE – B
Bachelor of Physical Education (B.P. Ed.) – Four-Year Professional Programme
Scheme of Study
Part-A, B & C
B.P. Ed. — Second Year
Part-A (Theory)
Paper Title of the Subjects with Code Credit Marks Internal
Assessment
10%
Paper-VII English -Communication Skills(ECS) 1 90 10
Paper-VIII Foundations of Physical Education (FPE) 1 90 10
Paper-IX Educational Methodology (EM) 1 70+20*P 10
Paper-X Sports Psychology (SP) 1 70+20*P 10
Paper-XI Recreation, Play, Camping and
Leadership Training(RPCLT)
1 90 10
Paper-XII Teaching Methodology in Physical
Education (TMPE)
1 70+20*P 10
Paper-XIII Physiology of Exercise (PE) 1 70+20*P 10
*P-Stands for marks for practical component.
Part-B (Activity – Skills and Prowess)
Paper Title of the subject Credit Marks Internal
assessment
20%
Athletics Teaching of Fundamentals, Rules and
Regulations and Measurements of
Fields
1 80 20
Badminton -do- 1 60 15
Kho-kho -do- 1 60 15
Kabbaddi -do- 1 60 15
Table Tennis -do- 1 60 15
Volleyball -do- 1 60 15
Handball -do- 1 60 15
Softball -do- 1 60 15
Part-C (Teaching Practice)
Teaching
Lessons
Athletics, Games, Calisthenics and
Theory – 5 lessons in each area, i.e.
5x 4 = 20 lessons.
1 80 20
NOTE: 1. Teaching practice will also continue in B.P. Ed. –Third Year.
2. Each student is required to pass separately in theory, practical and respective
internal assessment.
3. Six hours per day will be devoted for theory and practice i.e. three hours for theory
and three hours for practice / practical work.
38
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : Second Year
Paper : VII
Time : 3 Hrs.
ENGLISH --
COMMUNICATIONS
SKILLS
(ECS)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90
Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Book Prescribed: Fluency in English, Unit I to Unit-IX (For stream A Course in English 1st
year) Department of English, University of Delhi published by Macmillan
India Ltd.
Section-A
Unit I Text 20 marks
Q. 1. One essay type question on Summary/Character/Theme (10 marks)
(one out of two with internal choice)
Q 2. Passage for Comprehension from text. (10 marks)
Unit II Language through Literature 20 marks
Q. 1. Short question-answers from Poetry. (8 marks)
Q. 2. Vocabulary/Synonyms/Antonyms/Idioms- (12 marks)
(Choice should be given) (from the Text)
Section-B
Unit III Business Communication 25 marks
(1) Short notes on e-mail/Tele-Conference/Fax/Telex/Body (3X4=12 marks)
Language/ Principles of Communication/Barriers to
Communication/ Grapevine (Any 3 out of 5)
(2) Tender notices, auction notices, public notice, memo (1X3=3 marks)
(one out of two with internal choice)
(3) Resume Writing/Job Application 10 mark
Unit IV Language-in-use 25 marks
A. (1) Correction of Sentences (5 marks)
(2) Transformation of Sentences (10 marks)
B. Precis-Writing (10 marks)
Note: The Units of the text-book should be taken up by the teacher in an exhaustive manner along
with all the exercises given at the end of each unit. The purpose is to teach language
39
(vocabulary syntax, grammatical concepts in an interactive manner) within a specific
context.)
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2ndYear
Paper : VIII
Time : 3 Hrs.
FOUNDATIONS OF
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(FPE)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 90
Minimum Pass Marks: 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will carry
two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II
• Definition of Terms: Physical Training, Physical Culture, Physical Education, Teaching and Coaching. Meaning
and Scope of Education and Physical Education.
o Aims and Objectives of Physical Education and its contribution to Education.
o Objectives of physical education at different levels of Education:
(i) Elementary Education.
(ii) Primary Education.
(iii) Secondary Education and
(iv) Higher Education
o Physical Education – is an Art and Science.
Unit –III
• Philosophical Principles: Philosophy, its meaning and nature; Educational Philosophies (naturalism, Idealism,
Pragmatism, Realism, Existentialism) and their application to physical education.
• Sociological Principles: Physical Education and their influence on society; Physical activities (Games and
Sports) as man’s cultural heritage.
• Physical Education as a factor in socialization of individuals and groups and its role in national integration.
• Role of Physical Education in context to social problems – unemployment, youth unrest and health related
problems.
• Introduction to social stratification and sports.
Unit-IV
• Biological Principles: Evolution of man; biped position, its advantages and disadvantages, activities as the
physical basis of life;
• Individual difference. Heredity and environment, sex differences, body types, implication of individual
differences in physical education.
• Growth and development. Principles governing physical and motor growth and development.
Chronological, anatomical, physiological and mental age in individuals, their role in developing and implementing
programmed of physical education.
40
Unit- V
• Psychological Principles: Theories of learning – traditional and modern; the learning process – laws of learning,
(primary, associates and concomitant) Factors and conditions which promote learning; individual differences and
learning; maturation and learning.
• Transfer of training and learning curve.
• Play, brief description of theories of play.
Books Recommended
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Gupta, A.K. and Narang, Priyanka “Facts and Foundation in Physical Education” (2006-07) Sports
Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Vaidhya, Rajesh “Principles of Physical Education” (2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Sharma, Sita Ram “Sociological Foundation in Physical Education and Sports”(2004) Friends
Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi.
• Bucher A Charles and Wuest Deborah A , “Foundation of Physical Education and Sports” (1998) 10th
edition St. Louis Times Mirror, Mosby College Publishing.
41
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2nd Year
Paper : IX
Time : 3 Hrs.
EDUCATIONAL
METHODOLOGY
(EM)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
UNIT-I TEACHING METHODS
• Concept of Teaching and learning. Maxims of Teaching.
• Methods of Teaching: Lecture Method, Demonstration Method, Discussion Method, Orientation Method,
Assignment Method, Problem Solving Method, Remedial Teaching Method, Project Method, Kindergarten
Method (Story telling method and action song method).
UNIT-III LESSONS, TEACHING AIDS AND STEPS FOR EFFECTIVE TEACHING
• Types of lessons: knowledge lesson and appreciation lesson.
• Teaching aids and their importance in teaching: Audio-Visual aids, charts, models, films, boards (Simple, graphic
and magnetic boards).
• Steps of Effective Teaching: Personal Preparation, Technical Preparation, Organising Subject Matter and
Presentation of subject matter.
UNIT-IV EDUCATIONAL TECHNOLOGY AND EVALUATION
• Meaning, Definitions, need and importance of Educational Technology for a teacher.
• Latest Technologies for the teachers: Telematics, Multimedia, Television and overhead projector.
• Evaluation Procedure: Old Concept and New Approach.
• Types of Examination. Unit Test, Terminal Tests, Achievement Test, Diagnostic Tests and Aptitude Test.
• Other tools of Evaluation: Rating Scales, Interview and check list.
UNIT-V PHASES AND LEVELS OF TEACHING
• Phases of teaching: Pre-active phase, interactive phase and post active phase and their operation or function.
• Levels of teaching: Memory level, understanding level and reflective level: relationship between learning and
teaching with regard to class climate, types of learning, levels of learning.
• Micro teaching: its concepts, phases, application, merits and demerits.
Practical Part
42
Practical experience to use overhead projector, multimedia, television, handy-cam etc. shall be provided
in the teaching technology lab of the institution.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Vaidhya, Rajesh and Ramakrishnan, K.S. “Lesson Planning in Education and Physical Education”
(2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Anil and Daljinder , “Methods in Physical Education” (2005) Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower,
Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi.
• Dutta, A.K. and Magumder, Indu “Students Teaching in Physical Education” (2004) Janvani
Prakashan Pvt. Ltd. 30/35, Gali No. 9, Vishwas Nagar, Shahdra, Delhi-110032
• Sandhu, Kiran “Professional Preparation and career development in Physical Education and
Sports”(2004) Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi.
• Gupta, A.K. “Research Methodology in Physical Education” (2003) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B
EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
43
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2nd Year
Paper : X
Time : 3 Hrs.
SPORTS PSYCHOLOGY
(SP)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
• Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II
• Meaning and definitions of sports psychology.
• Origin and development of sports psychology.
• Need of sports psychology in physical education and sports.
• Competition, sports competition, its merits and demerits.
• Psychological factors affecting sports performance – stress, anxiety, tension, fear, and aggression;
and their management.
Unit-III
• Meaning, definition and nature of motor skill learning.
• Principles / conditions of motor skill learning.
• Learning curve, its types, characteristics; Plateau in learning curve, its reasons and solutions; and the
implications of learning curve in physical education and sports.
Unit-IV
• Meaning and definition of motivation, motives, drives and needs.
• Types of motivation.
• Conditions and factors for sports motivation.
• Method of motivation.
• Importance of motivation in the field of physical education and sports.
Unit – V
• Meaning, concept and definition of personality.
• Characteristics and dimensions of personality.
• Personality traits and its classification.
• Factors affecting the development of personality.
• Athletic / Sports performance and personality.
• Attention: Definition, nature, characteristics, types, and role of attention in physical education and sport.
Strategies for improving attention.
• Interest: Meaning, definition, types, ways and means of arousing and sustaining student’s interests in physical
education and sports.
Practical Part:
The students will be exposed to the following tests to provide practical knowledge:
44
(a) Sports Competitive Anxiety Test (SCAT)
(B) Reaction Time Test (RTT)-Visual and Auditory
BOOKS RECOMMENDED :
• Cratty, B.J (1989). “Psychology in contemporary sports”. Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs,
N.J.
• Kamlesh, M.L., (1998). “Psychology in Physical Education and Sports”. Metropolitan Book
Co., New Delhi.
• Punj, A.T. (1980). “Sports Psychology”, NIS, Patiala.
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Sahani, Sanjeev P. “Psychology and its application in Sports” (2005)1st edition – D.V.S. Publication
• Kamlesh M.L. “Psychology in Physical Education and Sports” – 4th edition Metropolitian Book Co.
New Delhi-2002
• Ward, Jame “Psychology applied to education” (2001) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
45
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2nd Year
Paper : XI
Time : 3 Hrs.
RECREATION, PLAY,
CAMPING AND
LEADERSHIP TRAINING
(RPCLT)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90
Minimum Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
• Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit: II Introduction to Recreation:
• Meaning, definition, scope and characteristics of recreation.
• Importance /significance of recreation.
• Aim, objective and scope of recreation.
• Types of recreation.
• Need and importance of recreation.
• Philosophy and principles of recreation.
Unit: III Programmes in Recreation.
• Criteria and Principles of selecting Programmes.
• Classification of recreation
• Indoor and outdoor activities.
• Water activities.
• Cultural activities.
• Literary activities.
• Nature and outing.
• Social events.
• Adventure activities.
Influence of Recreation in Social Institution
• Family.
• Educational Institutions.
• Community Centres.
• Religious Organizations.
• Factors/changes in the society responsible for affecting the need for recreation.
Unit: IV Play
• Meaning and definition of play.
• Aim, objective and significance of play.
• Various theories of play.
46
• The significance of study of theories of play for the teacher of PhysicalEducation.
Camping
• Meaning, aim and objective of the camp.
• Scope of camping.
• Need and importance of the camp.
• Types of camp.
• Uses of camping/outdoor activities.
• Organization and administration of camping.
• Selection and layout of the camp site.
• Camping leadership and supervision.
• Camp programme.
• Agencies promoting camp.
• Evaluation of camp.
• Educational values of camp.
Unit: V Leadership Training
• Meaning and definition of a leader and leadership.
• Nature and characteristics of leader.
• Types of leaders.
• Brief history of leadership training in physical education.
• Qualification and qualities of leader.
• Need and importance of leadership in physical education.
Books Recommended :
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Thour, Mandeep “Camping Management in Physical Education”(2006) Friends Publication, 6,
Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi.
• Jain, Deepak “Physical Education and Recreational Activities”(2002) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New
Delhi.
• Dutta, A.K. “Games and Sports for Children” (2004)1st edition - Janvani Prakashan Pvt. Ltd. 30/35,
Gali No. 9, Vishwas Nagar, Shahdra, Delhi-110032
47
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2nd Year
Paper : XII
Time : 3 Hrs.
TEACHING
METHODOLOGY IN
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(TMPE)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
• Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II
• Meaning and scope of methods, factors influencing methods of teaching formal and informal methods of
teaching, learning process and conditions of learning.
• Classification of pupils in Physical Education and its importance.
• Methods of Classification of Pupils.
• Age and Gender Characteristics – physical and psychological, mental and cognitive and social characteristics
during infancy or babyhood, early childhood, later childhood and adolescence.
Unit-III
• Principles of teaching: (simple to complex, part to whole, learning by doing, intrinsic and extrinsic motivation,
frequency and duration of instructions, recognition, methods of teaching physical activities, individual and group
teaching, capacity of learner.
• Teaching of Activities:
(i) Athletics.
(ii) Callisthenic’s
(iii) Major Games
(iv) Minor Games.
(v) Rhythmic Activities.
(vi) Light Apparatus.
(vii) Marching.
Unit-IV
• Presentation technique (Planning, Presentation, Organisation, Supervision and Evaluation).
o Steps in teaching motor skills.
o Commands and their importance.
o Types of class formation in teaching and learning process.
o Class management.
• Lesson Plan: importance and objectives, various aspects of lesson plan; teaching and coaching lesson plans
(games, sports, calisthenics and theory) in physical education, evaluation of general and specific lesson plans.
• Marking of Tracks and other Fields: Football, Hockey, Basketball, Badminton, Lawn-tennis, Handball, Kabaddi,
Kho-Kho, Cricket, Softball and Volleyball.
Unit – V
48
• Marking of 400 mtr and 200 mtr tracks and other fields – Football, Handball, Hockey, Kabaddi, Kho-kho, Cricket,
Basketball and Softball.
• Intramural and Extramural: Meaning, need, importance and their organisation.
• Tournaments / competitions: meaning, need, importance and types of tournaments (Knock-out, league,
combination and challenge).
• Athletic Meet, Camping, Picnic, Sports meet: Meaning, aim, objectives, advantages, types and organisation.
Practical Part:
(a) Marking of tracks and other fields (Mentioned in the Unit-III), on charts/thermo coal/ wooden
board or other material and then transferring them to the actual ground. For this purpose the
students shall be given conversion of measurement units, i.e. from metres to centimeters.
(b) Project work of conducting and organizing of Intramurals, Practice Matches and Athletic Meet.
Books Recommended
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Kutty, Suresh “Research Methods in Physical Education” (2007) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B
EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• D.R. Sharma and et. al, “Learning Callisthenic in Physical Education”(2005) - Friends Publication, 6,
Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Sandhu, Kiran “Professional Preparation and career development in Physical Education and
Sports”(2004) Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Sherril, Claudine “Adaptive Physical Activity, Recreational and Sports” (1998) 5th edition -
McGraw Hill Publisher Ltd.
• Bucher Charles A . and Wuest Deborah A , “Foundation of Physical Education and Sports” (1989)
10th edition St. Louis Times Mirror, Mosby College Publishing .
49
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Second Year
B.P. Ed. : 2nd Year
Paper : XIII
Time : 3 Hrs.
PHYSIOLOGY OF
EXERCISE
(PE)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70
Minimum Pass Marks : 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will carry
two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II
• Definition of physiology and exercise physiology.
• Importance and role of exercise physiology in the field of Physical Education and sports.
• Effects of physical training on respiratory, cardiac and muscular systems.
Unit- III
• Structure: The basis for contraction – sliding filament theory.
• Function of skeleton muscle: The motor unit.
• Different kinds of Motor Units (fast twitch and slow twitch fibers).
• The execratory system, its structure and functions
• Brief introduction of reproductive system; process of reproduction in human being. The function of male and
female reproductive system.
Unit-IV
• Circulatory System.
• Stroke volume, cardiac output, pulse rate.
• Effect of training on functioning of heart.
• Changes in blood cells during exercise.
• Blood pressure changes during exercise.
• Measurement of blood pressure and effect of exercise on systolic and diastolic blood pressure.
Unit-V
• Respiratory System: Its functions and mechanism.
• Vital capacity, tidal volume, residual volume, inspiration and expired air pressure.
• Transportation of gases: at lungs level and cellular level.
• Changes during exercise in respiratory system.
Practical part
* Measurement of Vital Capacity (VC) and learning of operation of Spiro meter
(Wet/Dry).
50
* Measurement of Cardio-respiratory Endurance (CRE) through Cooper’s 9 /12Min. Run /Walk Test and
Harvard Step Test etc.
Books Recommended:
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Khanna G.L. and Goswami, A. “Exercise Physiology”(2007) - Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Tiwari, Sandhya “Exercise Physiology”,(2006) 2nd edition - Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Jonathan K. Ehrman and et al, “Clinical Exercise Physiology” (2003)- Human Kinetic Publisher inc.
USA.
• Williams D. McARDLE and et al, “Exercise Physiology”, (1996) 4th edition – Human Kinetic
Publisher inc. USA.
• Vaidya Ratan, “Hnddbook of Human Physiology” (1993) Jaypee Brothers.
51
ANNEXURE-II (Pages )
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
SYLLABUS OF ACTIVITY – SKILL & PROWESS AND TEACHING PRACTICE
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
ATHLETICS (Track and Field) for Men and Women
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of the event and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the events.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of each event.
6. Importance of hygiene for an athlete.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Track Events
Relays: 4x100m and 4x400m
(a) Baton Exchange Techniques: - Visual &Non Visual
(b) Baton Exchange zones
(c) Equipment Required
(d) Fixing up runners for different relay races.
(e) Rules &Regulations for Competition
Field Events
Shot- Put
(a) Techniques-: Perry O’Brien and Disco-Put.
(b) Teaching Stages: Hand hold, Placement of shot, Initial stance, T-position,
Glide, Delivery stance, Delivery action and follow through/reverse
(c) Rules and Regulations for Competition
Discuss Throw
(a) Teaching Stages: Hand hold, Initial stance ,Preliminary swings, Turn,
Delivery Stance, Delivery action and Reverse
(b) Rules &Regulations for Competition
High Jump
(a) Techniques: - Straddle Roll and Fosbury Flop Techniques
(b) Teaching Stages Approach run, Take off, Flying phase, bar clearance and
landing.
(c) Rule and Regulations for competition.
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
52
Note: The Fosbury Flop technique shall be taught, if proper facilities are available.
Books Recommended For Study
1. Singh, Baljeet “Athletic Conditioning” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
2. Bosen,Ken O.,”Track and Field Fundamental Techniques”, Patiala:N.I.S. Publication.
3. Dyson, Geoffrey HG, Edumndson, Joseph, “Athletics for Schools.” (1969)University of London Press
Ltd..
4. Doherty, J. Mannet, “Track&Field” Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice Hall Inc.
5. Dyoon, Geoffrey, G.H. The Mechanic of Athletics (1962) London University of London press Ltd.,
6. Hodks, Gens.Application off Weight Tranning to Athletics.( 1962) Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice
Hall Inc.,
7. Malhotra, Ashok Kumar A Guide to be an Athlete, Krishna Publication Books New Delhi.
Mohan, V.M. Athletics for biggners, Metropolitan Books New Delhi.
53
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
BADMINTON
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Badminton including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard require for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a badminton player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Grips:-
Racket and shuttle grips.
Foot Work:-
The stance, pivot, forehand return and back court return.
Serves:-
Short and long serves.
Strokes:-
Fore hand stroke, Back hand stroke, Over head stroke and Net stroke.
Smash:-
Fore hand and back hand smash.
The Drop:
Types of Games:-
Singles, doubles and mixed doubles.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan:Equal distribution)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignment.
Books Recommended For Study
Thani, L “ Skill and Tactics Badminton (1998) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Jain, Anu “ Badminton Coaching Manual (2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Davis Pat, “Guiness Book of Badminton.”( 1983.) Pat Devis & Guiness Superlatives Limited
Downey Jake, “Better Badminton for All.” (1982)Pelham Books Limited.
Davic Part,”Better Badminton Learn in Yourself Book.”(1979),Orient Paper Books, London.
Doway, J.C.,”Better Badminton for All.”(1969), Pelham Books Ltd. Great Britain.
Pelton,Berry C,”Badminton.”(1971),N,J,Printice Hall Inc.Englewood Cliffs.
54
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
KHO-KHO
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Kho-Kho including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a kho-kho player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS - General Skills:-Running between poles, chasing, dodging, faking etc.
Skills in Chasing:-
Correct kho, moving on the lanes, pursuing the runner, trapping the inactive runner,
trapping the runner on heels, trapping on the poles, diving, judgment in giving kho, and
rectification of foul.
Skills in Running:-
Zigzag running, single and double chain, ring play, rolling in the sides, dodging while facing and on
the back fakes, on the pole fake-legs, body, arms etc., combination of different skills.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan:( Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
“Kho-Kho the Game of Chase and Trill.” Kho-Kho Association, Maharashtra, Bombay.
Yogesh Yadav,” Kho-Kho.” (1969), Maharashtra Kho-Kho Association, Bombay.
55
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
KABADDI
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Kabaddi including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of
national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a kabaddi player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
The Cant: Kabaddi, Kabaddi, Kabaddi - -
Skills in Raiding:-
Touching with hand, toe touch, various kicks- side kick, front kick, curve kick, cross kick, roll
kick, mule kick or back kick, fly kick etc; crossing the baulk line, crossing the bonus line, luring the
opponent to catch and pursuing.
Skills of Catching (holding) the Raider:-
Different chain formations, catching of particular part of the body- ankle catch, double ankle catch,
knee catch, double knee catch, thigh catch, double thigh catch wrist catch, crocodile catch, shoulder catch,
washer man hold etc., jump and dive catch, luring the raider to take particular position so as to facilitate
catching.
Additional Skills Raiding and Catching:-
Bringing the opponents into particular position, escaping from various holds, techniques
of escaping from chain formation, combined formations in offence and defense.
Positional and systems of play:
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan : (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Rao, C.V.,”Kabaddi.”(1971), NIS. Publications, Patiala.
Reddy, B.A.,”Scientific Kabaddi.”(1974), Raman’s Printing Press,Madras.
56
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
TABLE TENNIS
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Table Tennis including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of
national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a Table Tennis player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Stance and foot work:
Body position, foot placement and movements.
The Grip:-
The Tennis Grip: Forehand grip and back hand grip.
The Pen holder grip.
Serves:-
Fore hand serve (Forward and backward spin serves).
Back hand serve (Forward and backward spin serves).
Side spin serve.
High toss serve.
Strokes :-( From both hands- forehand and back hand)
Push, chop, drive (with top spin), half volley, smash, drop-shot, ballon, flick shit and long force.
Game Tactics:-
Defensive and attacking in singles, doubles and mixed doubles.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan; (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Chaudhary, P “ Table Tennis Coaching Manual” (2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Earna Victor,” Your Book of Table Tennis.” (1971), Faber and Faber Ltd. 3, Queen Square, London.
Myers Harold,” Table Tennis.”(1977), Faber and Faber Ltd. 3, Queen Square, London.
Sklorz Martin,” Sport Table Tennis.”(1973),E,P, Ltd. Cast Ardsley, Wakefield, Yorkshire.
Varner, Margaret and Harrison J.R. Brown, “Physical Education, Activities Series, Table Tennis.” WM. C.
Brown Company Dubuque, IOWA.
57
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
VOLLEYBALL
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Volleyball including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a volleyball player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Player’s Stance-while receiving and passing the ball.
Passes (overhead and underhand):-
The volley (overhead pass) and the dig (underhand pass).
Serves:-
Under arm serve, side arm serve, tennis serve, Round arm serve, float serve and smash serve.
Spike/ Smash:-
Straight arm spike and round arm spikes.
Blocks:-
Single block.
ADVANCE SKILLS
Pass:-
Back pass, Back roll volley, Back roll dig, Side roll dig and Jump and pass.
Serve:-
Side arm floater and overhead floating serve.
Spike:-
Spiking cross the court and spiking down the court.
Block:-
Double block and triple block.
Dive:-
Dive combined with dig (One handed) and dive combined with dig (Two handed).
Systems of Play:-
5 – 1 and 4 -2 systems of play with rotation of serve.
NOTE:- Advance skills may be taught during the specialization in the fourth year of B.P.Ed.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
58
Books Recommended For Study
Kus Sally, “Coaching Volleyball Successfully.” Human Kinetics P.O. Box 5076 Champaign, IL61825-5076
Arora, Monica “ Volleyball Coaching Manual” (2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Anthony, Don.”Success in Volleyball.” (1978), John Murray Publishers Ltd. London.
Nicholls, Keith.” Modern Volleyball for Teachers, Coaches and Players.”(1970), Lepus Books, London.
Sandhu, G.S.” Volleyba[[:Basic and Advanced.” The Sports People, Chandigarh.
Sandefur Kandy.” Volleyball.” (1970), Goodyear Publishing Company, Inc. California.
Siyamaker, Thomas and Brown, Virgine H.”Power Volleyball.” (1976), Sounders Company, London.
Sotir, Nicholas.” Winning Volleyball.”(1975), Stanley Paul, London.
59
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
HANDBALL
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Handball including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of national
and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a handball player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Basic stance, hand and feet movements.
Running and Catching the Ball:-
Running and catching the ball with two hands, Catching at chest height, Catching the high ball
and catching the low ball.
Passing and Throwing the Ball:-
One hand shoulder pass, two hand chest pass and the long throw.
Dribbling (Running with the Ball)
Shooting:-
The standing throw, the sides throw, the jump shot, the reverse shot, the fall shot, and the goal
keeping.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
O.P. Sharma, “Handball Rule Book.” (2006) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road,
Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Mand, Charles L. “Handball Fundamentals.” (1968), Cinio, Charles E. Merrill Company, Columbus.
Philips, B.E.”Handball its Play and Management”(1957), The Ronald Press, New York.
Robarson,Richard and Olson Herbert.” Beginning Handball.”(1969), Wadsworth Company, Inc. Belmont.
Rowland B.J.”Handball: A Complete Guide.”(1970), Faber and Faber Ltd. 24 RussellA Square, London.
60
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
SOFTBALL
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. History of Softball including important tournaments and distinguish personalities of
national and international repute.
2. Introduction about the game/sport and its historical development with special reference to
India.
3. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
4. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a Softball player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Batting:-
The grip: Short, long and standard.
The stance: Parallel, open and closed.
Swing and hitting.
Bunting.
Pitching:-
The grip: Three and four finger.
Windmill and figure of eight.
Base Running:-
Running to first base.
Running more than one base.
Base stealing.
Fielding:-
Fielding ground balls.
Fielding fly balls.
Game Tactics:-
Batting strategy.
Fielding strategy.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)-
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c ) Professional Attitude, and
(d ) Assignments.
61
B.PEd.-SECOND YEAR
PART-C( TEACHING PRACTICE)
TEACHING PRACTICE
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. Importance of teaching practice in physical education.
2. To develop efficiency in the conduct and teaching of physical activities of formal nature.
3. To prepare the student-teacher to face the students in theory as well as activity classes.
4. To teach Free Hand Exercises emphasizing on physical fitness, rhythmic sense and neuromuscular
co-ordination.
5. To teach and provide organized physical education activities emphasizing on skill learning,
leadership, orderly behaviour and enjoyment.
6. To develop the skill of teaching of students of different age groups of different gender.
7. To prepare the students to handle the class of different durations.
8. To prepare the student-teacher to handle the class effectively and efficiently during the
university examination in the presence of the internal examination board.
Review of the syllabus taught in B.P.ED.-FIRST YEAR under Light apparatus /Calisthenics activity
FORMAL LESSONS (Five lessons in each area –Athletics, games, calisthenics and theory)
Note:-B.P.Ed.- first year students will be engaged to conduct five lessons in each area mentioned above.
Proper lesson plan shall be prepared by each student- teacher. The lessons will be supervised by the faculty
members, who would discuss the merits and demerits of the concerned lesson and guide the student-teacher
for the future. Each lesson should be completed as per the plan mentioned in the lesson plan.
Evaluation Plan: (Equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended For Study
Datta,A.K.,and Mazumdar, I.,”Students Teaching in Physical Education.”2004, Janvani
Prakshan(P)Ltd.30/35, Gali No. 9, Vishwas Nagar, Shahdra, Delhi-110032.
Govt. of India Publication,” The Fitness Corps.”
“Hand Book of Physical Education.”(1995),Friends Publication(India),6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee
Nagar-Delhi.
62
TITLES OF THE SUBJECTS FOR BACHELOR OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(B.P. Ed.) – FOUR YEAR PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMME
B.P. Ed. THIRD YEAR (THEORY) – PART -A (Annexure-C)
1. English-Communication Skills (Paper-XIV)
2. Kinesiology and Bio-Mechanics (paper-XV)
3. Sports Management (Paper-XVI)
4. Measurement and Evaluation (Paper-XVII).
5. Applied Computer Education & Statistics in Physical Education (Paper-XVIII).
6. Health Education (Paper-XIX).
7. Sociology of Sports (Paper-XX).
Note:
1. Scheme of study of Part-A, B & C is given in Annexure-C, followed by Syllabus of Part-A
(Theory)
2. Syllabus for Part-B (Activity Skill and Prowess) and Part-C (Teaching Practice) are given in
Annexure-III at the end of the theory syllabus.
63
ANNEXURE – C
Bachelor of Physical Education (B.P. Ed.) – Four-Year Professional Programme
Scheme of Study
Part-A, B & C
B.P. Ed. — Third Year
Part-A (Theory)
Paper Title of the Subjects with Code Credit Marks Internal
Assessment
10%
Paper-XIV English -Communication Skills(ECS) 1 90 10
Paper-XV Kinesiology and Bio-mechanics(KBM) 1 70+20*P 10
Paper-XVI Sports Management (SM) 1 90 10
Paper-XVII Measurement and Evaluation(ME) 1 70+20*P 10
Paper-XVIII Applied Computer Education and
Statistics in Physical Education(ACESPE)
1 70+20*P 10
Paper-XIX Health Education (HE) 1 90 10
Paper-XX Sociology of Sports (SS) 1 90 10
*P- Stands for marks for practical component.
Part-B (Activity – Skills and Prowess)
Paper Contents of Games and Sports Credit Marks Internal
Assessment
20%
Athletics Teaching of Fundamentals, Rules and
Regulations and Measurements of
Fields
1 80 20
Tennis -do- 1 60 15
Yoga -do- 1 60 15
Hockey -do- 1 60 15
Cricket -do- 1 60 15
NOTE: To give more time to teaching practice in the schools lesser number of games has been
given in third year.
Part-C (Teaching Practice)
One theory, one game,
one athletic, one
calisthenics lesson shall
be opted by the students
for annual university
examination.
Ten supervised lessons for each
activity i.e. class room teaching,
game lesson, athletic lesson and
calisthenics lesson. 10x4= 40 lessons
2 160 40
NOTE: 1. Each lesson will be of 50 marks including internal assessment. There will be External Examination.
2. Each student is required to pass separately in theory, practical and respective assessment.
3. Six hours per day will be devoted for theory and practice i.e. three hours for theory and three
hours for practice / practical work.
64
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XIV
Time : 3 Hrs.
ENGLISH --
COMMUNICATIONS SKILLS
(ECS)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90
Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Book Prescribed: Fluency in English- Unit 10 to 18 (prescribed by University of Delhi for
B.A. Programme Stream A Course in English 1st year) Macmillan India
Ltd.
Section-A
Unit I Text 20 marks
Q. 1. One essay type question on Summary/Character/Theme
(one out of two with internal choice) (10 marks)
Q 2. Passage for Comprehension from text. (10 marks)
Unit II Language through Literature 20 marks
Q. 1. (i) Central Idea/Summary of poem. (5 marks)
(ii) Explanation of a stanza with reference to the context. (5marks)
Q. 2. Vocabulary/Synonyms/Antonyms/Idioms (from the text) (10 marks)
Section-B
Unit III Communication Skills 30 marks
Q 1. (i) Welcome Address, Thank-You notes. (10 marks)
(ii) Report Writing ( of functions in particular) (10 marks)
OR
(iii) Minutes of a meeting, agenda, notice of meeting.
Q 2. Request Letters, Good News and Bad News Letters, Persuasive (10 marks)
Letters; Sales Letters, Letter to Editor
Unit IV Language-in-use 20marks
Q 1. Transformation of Sentences, One-word substitution (all types) (10 marks)
(5+5 marks)
Q 2. Translation of a passage from M.I.L. into English. (10 marks)
OR
Précis- Writing
65
Note: The Units of the text-book should be taken up by the teacher in an exhaustive manner
alongwith all the exercises given at the end of each unit. The purpose is to teach language
(vocabulary syntax, grammatical concepts in an interactive manner) within a specific context.
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XV
Time : 3 Hrs.
KINESIOLOGY AND
BIOMECHANICS
(KBM)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 70
Minmum Pass Marks: 28
Practical Marks ; 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit-I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First
question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II
Kinesiology: Introduction, Meaning and Definitions.
• Importance of Kinesiology for games and sports.
• Anatomical Position and movement of joints
• Planes and axis.
• Muscular skeletal system-origin and insertion of muscles.
• Types of Muscular Contraction.
• Different roles of muscles in a total movement.
Unit-III
• Structure and movements of the following joints:
Neck, shoulder girdle, shoulder joint, elbow, trunk, hip, knee, ankle and foot.
Unit-IV
• Meaning and Scope of biomechanics in physical education.
• Meaning of linear kinematics and their application in sports.
• Meaning of linear kinetics and their application in sports.
• Meaning of the terms: Centre of gravity, equilibrium, stability, levers, centripetal and centrifugal forces
and their application in sports.
Unit- V
• Muscular analysis of fundamental skills: Walking, running, jumping, and throwing.
Practical Part
• Demonstration of fundamental movements of major joints of upper and lower extremities.
• Demonstration of fundamental movements with reference to various axes and planes.
Books Recommended
66
• Goswami, Jogiswar “Basic Kinesiology” (2007) 1st edition - Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower,
Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Abernethy, Bruce and et al, “The Biophysical Foundation of Human Movement”(2005) 2nd edition -
Human Kinetic Publisher inc. USA.
• D. Gordon .F and et al, “Research Methods in Biomechanics” (2004) Nancy Elgin Publication.
67
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XVI
Time : 3 Hrs.
SPORTS MANAGEMENT
(SM)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 90
Minimum Pass Marks: 36
Internal Assessment: 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
UNIT-1
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit of the
Question Paper which is compulsory
UNIT-1I FUNDAMENTALS OF MANAGEMENT
---- Management in Physical Education and Sports: Concept, meaning and definition; need and scope of management; and
scope of management in sports.
---- Theories of Management: The classical theory, the Neo-classical theory and Modern Theory
---- Types of Management: Authoritarian management, Laissez-faire Management and Democratic Management.
---- Functions of Management: Planning, Organising, Staffing, Directing, Co-ordaining, Budgeting, Controlling and
evaluating.
---- Management Skills: Technical skills, Human Skills, and Conceptual Skills.
---- Managerial and its Roles: Interpersonal Roles, Informational Roles, Decision Making Roles.
---- Qualities and Qualifications of a Manager: Personal Qualities, Leadership Qualities; and Academic and Professional
Qualities.
UNIT-11I MANAGEMENT AND TECHNIQUES
---- Personnel Management: Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Principles of personnel Management; Aspects of personnel
management, Job Analysis, Description and specification.
---- Management Procedure: Introduction, Techniques of framing procedures, Policies and procedures pertaining to physical
education and sports.
---- Meetings: Meaning, characteristics and types of meetings, effective procedures of handling of meetings.
---- Office Management: Meaning, Nature (Centralized and Decentralized) and functions of office management, Aspects of
office management.
---- Financial Management: Introduction, objective and scope of financial management, Purpose and Principles of Financial
Management in physical education and sports.
---- The Budget: Meaning, Definition and objective of the budget, Principles of Planning the Budget, Preparation of budget.
---- Public Relations: Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Purpose need and Importance and Principles of Public relations in
physical education and sports. Planning and organizing the public relations programme. Public relations Media (Direct and
Indirect), Suggestion and evaluation for improving the public relation programme.
68
UNIT-IV
ORGANISTION AND ADMINISTRATION
---- Meaning and Definitions: Introduction, Meaning of Organization, Administration, Management and Planning;
Need and importance of Organization and Administration in Physical Education and Sports; Need of
Administrative Policies, Guiding Policies of a good Administrator(Function on the Basis of Facts, Be Just to his
Staff, Students, Public, Opponents & Competitors, and Educational System).
---- Intramurals and Extramural
Introduction and Meaning of Intramural and Extramural Programmes and their Objectives. Organization and
Administrative Set-up of Intramural and Extramural Programmes. Policies and Practices for Organization and
Management of Intramurals and Extramural.
----- Instructional Programme: Introduction, Meaning, Design and Management of the Instructional Programme,
Factors to be Considered in Making the Instructional Programme Effective(Time Table, Class Size, Time
Allotment, Teaching Area/Station, Students Grouping, Faculty Utilization, Special Instructional Methods and
Marking (Grading) of Students).
---- Curriculum Development and Management: Introduction, Meaning, Definitions, Nature, Objectives and
Goals of Curriculum. Framework or Scope of Curriculum, Principles of Curriculum Development, Steps in
Curriculum Planning, Curriculum Trends and Patterns, Selection and Sequence of Contents (Curriculum).
UNIT-V
MANAGEMENT OF SPORTS FACILITIES, EQUIPMENT, SUPERVISION AND EVALUATION
---- Management of Facilities: Introduction, Administrative and General Principles of Planning Facilities, Types of
Facilities, Facility Requirements, Construction and Management of Sports Infrastructures, Indoor Facilities-
Gymnasium and Swimming pool.
---- Management of Equipment and Material: Introduction, Meanings of Equipment and Material, Need and
Importance, Types, Procurement and Principles of Procurement of Equipment.
Principles of Purchase of Equipment. Purchase Procedure, Important Considerations in Selecting Sports
Equipment, Receiving—Stocktaking and Storing Equipment, Care and Maintenance & Conservation of
Equipment, Improvisation and Modernization of Equipment, and Disposal of Equipment.
---- Supervision: Introduction, Meaning, Definitions, Aim and Objectives, Nature and Scope, Principles and
Techniques, Need and Importance and Guidelines for Effective Supervision in Physical Education and Sports.
---- Evaluation: Introduction, Concept, Meaning, Definition, Nature, Purpose, Need and Importance of Evaluation
for a Teacher and Administrator of Physical Education and Sports. Important Pints, Steps and Guidelines for an
Effective Evaluation Programme.
---- Managerial and Administrative Duties: Instructional, Office, Finance, Facilities, Public Relations,
Personnel, Professional, Purchases, Intra-murals, Extra-murals etc Duties- of Teacher of Physical
Education/Director Sports/A Coach.
REFERNCE BOOKS:
----Dheer, S and Radhika Kamal,”Organisation and Administration of Physical Education”.(1991),
Friends Publications,6 Mukherjee Tower, Mukherjee Nagar, Com. Complex, Near Batra
Cinema,Delhi- 1100009.
--- Kamlesh, M.L. “Management Concepts in Physical “. (2000), Meteropolitan Books Co. Private LTD.,1,
Netaji Subhash Marg, New Delhi-1100002.
--- Jenson, Clayne R.”Administraive Management of Physical Education and Athletic Programs”.(1983), Lea
& Febiger,600 washington Square,Philadelphia, PA 19106,USA.
--- Roy, Sudhanshu Shekhar,”Sports Management”.(1995) Friends Publications, 6, Mukherjee Tower,
Mukherjee Nagar, Com. Complex, Near BATRA Cinema, New Delhi-1100009.
--- Thomas, J.P.”Organisation of Physical Education”.(1972), Gnanodaya Press,11,Anderson Street, Madras-1.
69
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XVII
Time : 3 Hrs.
MEASUREMENT AND
EVALUATION
(ME)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 70
Minimum Pass Marks: 28
Practical Marks : 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required tobe covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit
of the Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II Concepts of Measurement and Evaluation
• Meaning of measurement and evaluation.
• Nature and scope of evaluation programme.
• Need and importance of evaluation in the field of physical education.
• Principles of evaluation.
Unit-III Tests
• Criteria of test selection.
• Factors affecting scientific authenticity.
• Procedure to establish scientific authenticity.
• Classification of test (standardized and teacher made test).
• Construction of tests (knowledge and skill tests).
• Administration of testing programme and its procedure and follow-up.
Unit-IV Measurement of Physical Performance
• Copper’s 12 minute run walk test.
• Harvard step test.
• Motor fitness test (Oregon motor fitness test, JCR test, Canadian fitness test, AAHPER Youth Fitness Test,
Indiana Motor Fitness Test).
• General motor ability test.
o McCloy’s general motor ability test.
o Methany Johnson Test.
Unit-V Measurement of strength, skill and posture.
• Kraus-Weber’s muscular fitness test.
• Instrument for measuring strength.
• Roger’s Physical Fitness Index.
• Volleyball – Brady Volleyball Test, Russell and Lange Volleyball Test.
Basketball – Johnson test, Knox test.
Soccer – McDonald test and Johnson.
Badminton – Miller Volley Test.
Hockey – Dribbling and Goal shooting test.
• Measures of posture – IOWA posture test.
70
• Anthropometric Measurement.
- Girth Measurement – Upper arm, forearm, calf, and chest.
- Width Measurement – Biacrominal chest, illiocrestal, Biepcondylar.
- Height Measurement – stature and sitting height.
Practical Part
Practical knowledge of conducting all those tests given in the syllabus shall be tested.
Books Recommended
• Vijayalaksmi, M. “Evaluation in Physical Education” – (2006) Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee
Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Madhuri T . W, “Measurement and Evaluation in Physical Education” (2006) Friends Publication, 6,
Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Mishra, Sharad Chandra “Test and Measurement in Physical Education”(2005) Sports Publication, G-
6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• McCloy, C.H. “Test and Measurement in Physical Education” (2004) Friends Publication, 6,
Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Mathew Doland .K , “Measurement in Physical Education’, (1973) 4th edition, W.B. Saunders
Company, London.
• Barrow and McGhee, “A Practical Approach to Measurement in Physical Education”.
71
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XVIII
Time : 3 Hrs.
APPLIED COMPUTER
EDUCATION AND
STATISTICS IN
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(ACESPE)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 70
Minimum Pass Marks: 28
Practical Marks ; 20
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over
the whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit-I Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First question/Unit
of the Question Paper which is compulsory
UNIT-II (A)
• Introduction, characteristics, history and classification of computers. Applications of computers.
• Hardware, software, input / output devices secondary storage devices.
• Networking concepts – LAN, WAN etc. Topologies.
• Operating System – Types and functions of an operating system.
• Translation interprets compilers and assembles.
UNIT-II (B) INTERNET
Intranet :-log on to internet
Types of internet connectivity, electronic-mail ,world wide web(www)
Html (understanding html, history of html, html document, describing tags, how to create a
html programs
Memory: Primary and Secondary memory, RAM, ROM, cache memory etc
UNIT-III
• Windows Basics – start widows, exit widows, starting an application, run and manage, multiple
applications, close applications. File management through window copy, delete, creating files and
directories and printing a document.
• Basics of word-processing, text selection, opening documents and creating documents, saving
documents, printing documents, editing text, finding and replacing text, spell check, grammar, facility,
formatting document, adding bonders and shading, adding headers and footers using mail merge.
• Worksheet basics, data entry in cells, text and formulate working with workbooks. Cell referencing,
formatting and calculations, Autodial number formatting, date formatting, working with groups and
charts, printing charts.
• Desktop publishing packages, number viruses, introduction to power point and Slide Show
Presentations.
• Sports Related Software
UNIT-IV
• Meaning of Statistics.
• Meaning of single score and quantitative data: kinds of data (continuous and discrete).
• Construction of frequency tables.
• Measures of central tendency (Mean, Medium, mode) its meaning and uses in physical education.
• Percentiles and quartiles meaning and uses.
72
• Graphical representation of a data: frequency polygon, cumulative, smoothed polygon, bar diagrams
and pie diagrams.
• Standard Deviation (SD): Meaning, computation and its utility in Physical Education.
UNIT-V
Correlation – Meaning, computation, and its utility in Physical Education.
Analysis of Variance:- Need for Analysis of Variance and types of Analysis of Variance
Analysis of Covariance :-Need for Analysis of Covariance, Application of Analysis of Covariance
• Meaning of terms: population and sampling.
o Importance and Principles of sampling.
o Techniques of sampling (Random, stratified, cluster and systematic)
Practical Part
Practical experience of computer handling shall be given in the computer lab
To make a project in HTML
Power point presentation or slide show presentation
Books Recommended
• Verma, J.P. “Text book of Sports Statistics” (2006-07)- Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Shaw, Dhananjoy “Fundamental Statistics in Physical Education and Sports Sciences”, (2006-07)
Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Kutty, Suresh “Research Methods in Physical Education” ( 2005) Sports Publication G-6, 23/23B
EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
73
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XIX
Time : 3 Hrs.
HEALTH EDUCATION (HE) Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 90
Minimum Pass Marks: 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
• Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First
question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory
Unit-II Health Education
• Health Education: definition, scope principles and practice of health education, planning and
evaluation in health education programmes. Organisation and administrative set up of health services
in India.
Unit-III Diseases
• Disease: Diseases cycle, Epidemiological trials, mode of disease transmission immunity.
• Health Problem in India: Problems related to communicable diseases: (HIV- AIDs, Hepatitis,
Malaria, Rabies and Tetanus) nutrition, environmental sanitation, medical care and population.
• National family welfare programme and mother and child health.
• Need for sex education.
Unit-IV Hygiene
• Hygiene: The concept of hygiene and personal hygiene care of skin, mouth, nails, clothing: bathing
etc. importance of rest, sleep and exercise.
• Community Health: Brief account of housing water supply, sewerage and refuse disposal.
• School Health Service: History, School Health Problems. Health appraisal, healthful school
environment, nutritional services, mental health, school health, school health records, safety
measures in the playfields – first aid and emergency care.
Unit-V Nutrition
• Meaning and definition of food, nutrition, balanced diet.
• Constituent of balance diet, its functions and sources.
• Daily energy requirements.
• Eating before, during and after competition
• Water loading.
Books Recommended
• Singh Ajmer and et al, “Essential of physical Education” (2007) 3rd edition, Kalyani Publisher B-
1/292, Rajinder Nagar Ludhiana Punjab.
• Pandey, P.K. and Gongopadhay, S. R. “Health Education for School Children”, Friends Publication,
6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi.
• Park, J.E. and Park , K. “Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine”, (1985) Bnasidar Bhanot ,
Publisher, Jabalpur-1985
• Park, J.E. and Park , K, “Text Book of Community Health for Nurses”, (1982) Asrani Publisher,
Jabalpur.
74
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.- Third Year
B.P. Ed. : Third Year
Paper : XX
Time : 3 Hrs.
SOCIOLOGY OF SPORTS (SP) Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written: 90
Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
Note:
(a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
(b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will carry
two marks.
(c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in respective
four units of the question paper.
(d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given Internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
(e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –1
• Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First
question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Meaning, definition, nature and scope of sociology and sociology of sports.
• Basic concepts of sociology: family, society, community, association, institution, state, folks, culture,
value and norms.
• Relationship of sports sociology with other disciplines. Psychology, history of mankind and physical
education.
• Historical approaches to social theory: Agency theories (social action theory) and structure theories
(social system theories).
• The History of sociology of sport: The developmental phase of the sociology of sports - reflection,
reproduction and resistance.
• Methodology and future trends in the sociology of sport.
Unit-III
• Politics and sport: Definitions of politics, policy, the state and government.
• Women participation in the Olympic Games – (brief history of female experience of sport and
changing trends).
• Economy and sports industry, sponsorship, tourism, hotel industry and entertainment.
• Social exclusion (sexually, gender, race, age, ethnicity, disability location and poverty).;
• Brief description of social exclusion and poverty and its relationships with sport and leisure.
• Combating poverty and exclusion in sport and leisure – talent search schemes / cards.
Unit-IV
• Sports as a game occurrence
• Sports as an Institutional game.
• Sports as a social institution.
• Sports as a Social Situation or Social System.
• Sports and Sportsmanship.
• Sports and Personality.
Unit-V
• Background of sport and disability.
75
• Constraints of disabled people in participation in physical activity and sports; (lack of motivation and
confidence; negative school experience; no proper support from family, friends and society, lack of
information on opportunities; transport problems; lack of time and money; poor physical access; poor
knowledge of provisions among physical education teachers; poor physical education training for
teachers in special schools).
• The Paralympics movement: classification, integration and the Paralympics.
• Perspectives on disability sport.
• Sport as a form of therapy and socialization.
Books Recommended
• Barric Houlihan, “Sports and Society”, SAGE Publication, (2005) 2nd edition,New Delhi.
• Singh, Yadwinder “Sociology in Sports”, (2005) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Sharma, Sita Ram “Sociological Foundation in Physical Education and Sports”( 2004) Friends
Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr. Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Jay Coaklay, Sports in Society, (2004) McGraw Hill Publication.
76
ANNEXURE-III(Pages)
B.P.Ed.-THIRD YEAR
SYLLABUS OF ACTIVITY – SKILL & PROWESS AND TEACHING PRACTICE
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
ATHLETICS (Track and Field) for Men and Women
Max.Marks: 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of the event and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute including national and
international competitions.
3. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
4. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the event.
5. International rules and regulations of each event.
6. Importance of hygiene for an athlete.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Track Events
Hurdle Races
(a) Teaching Stages: Swinging leg action, Trailing leg action, Clearance of
hurdle emphasizing on proper trunk position action, Development of stride
rhythm from start to first hurdle, between hurdles and strides between the last
hurdle and finishing line
(b) Rules &Regulations for Competition.
Field Events
Pole Vault
(a) Teaching Stages: Pole grip and carry, the run and Pole plant, take off, Rock
back Pull up, Push up, bar clearance and Landing.
(b) Rules &Regulations for Competition.
Javelin Throw
(a) Teaching Stages: Techniques of holding and carrying javelin (Grip and
Carry-its types), Approach run, Last five strides rhythm, Delivery stance and Reverse
(b) Rules &Regulations for Competition.
Hammer Throw
(a) Teaching Stages: Grip, Initial Stance, Preliminary swings, Transition from
swings to turns, Turns, Delivery Stance, Delivery action ,Release and
Reverse.
(b) Rules &Regulations for Competition
Evaluation Plan (Equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
77
Books Recommended for Study
1. Singh, Baljeet “Athletic Conditioning” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
2. Novich M. Max, “Training & Conditioning of Athletes.” (1983)Lea & Febriger 600S. Washington
Square Philadelphia, PA 19106, USA
3. Bosen,Ken O.,”Track and Field Fundamental Techniques”, Patiala:N.I.S. Publication.
4. Dyson, Geoffrey HG, Edumndson, Joseph, “Athletics for Schools.” (1969) University of London
Press Ltd..
5. Doherty, J. Mannet, “Track&Field” Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice Hall Inc.
6. Dyoon, Geoffrey, G.H. The Mechanic of Athletics (1962) London University of London press Ltd.
7. Hodks, Gens.Application off Weight Training to Athletics (1962) Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice
Hall Inc.
8. Malhotra, Ashok Kumar A Guide to be an Athlete, Krishna Publication Books New Delhi.
9. Mohan, V.M. Athletics for beginners, Metropolitan Books New Delhi
78
B.PEd.-THIRD YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
TENNIS
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of tennis and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute including national and
international tournaments.
3. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
4. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a tennis player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Grips:
Eastern forehand grip, eastern backhand grip, western grip, continental grip and chopper grip.
Stance and Footwork
Basic Ground Strokes:
Forehand drive and backhand drive.
Basic Service
Basic Volley
Overhead Volley
Smash
Drop Shots
Chop
Tactics:
Offensive and defensive strokes.
Across offensive and defensive tactics.
Singles and doubles offensive and defensive tactics.
Lead-up Games:
Evaluation Plan(Equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
79
Books Recommended for Study
Chaudhary, Pankaj “Tennis Coaching Manual” (2005) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Cayer, Louis “ Double Tennis Tactics” ”(2004) 2nd edition - Human Kinetic Publisher inc. USA.
Brown, Jim.” Tennis Strokes Strategy and Programmes.”(1980), Prentice hall Inc. the Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersey.
Eighton Jim.”Inside Tennis-Tecniques of Winning.”Prentice Hall Inc. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey.
Howtan Marry.” How to Play Winning Tennis.”(1979),Ecothirtfy One West 39th Street, New York.
Trengove, Alan.”The Art of Tennis.”(1964), Holdex and Strayahten Ltd. Wravick Lane, New York.
80
B.P.Ed.-THIRD YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
YOGA
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of yoga and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute.
3. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
4. To equip the students with the knowledge of yogic system of exercise, its broad features, scope and
limitations.
5. To know the contribution of yogic practices for the promotion of various aspects of health and
fitness.
6. To know the benefits of yogic exercises , cautions and the therapeutic aspects of yoga.
7. To impart the knowledge of varieties of yogic practices with special reference to their significance of
their name, technique and utility.
8. To know about the nature of diet for human being as per the practices followed by the yogis.
9. International rules and regulations of the game.
10. Importance of hygiene for a yogi.
11. Etiquette.
12 Tests/Evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Meditative Poses:-
Sukhasana, swastikasana, padamasana, vajrasana and siddhasana.
Cultural Poses:-
Bhujangasana, dhanurasana, halasana, vakrasana, savasana, vrikshasana, tadasna, mayurasana,
parvatasana, Matsyasana, makarasana, shalabhasana,suryanamaskar, paschimotansana, ardhshalabhasana,
ardh-matsyendrasana, sarvangasana, shirshasana, naukasana, utkatasana etc.
Pranayama
Bandha:-Uddiyan
Mudra
Kriya
Evaluation Plan( Equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
81
Books Recommended for Study
Debnath, Monica “Basic Core Fitness through Yoga and Naturopathy” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-
6,23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Yogeswar, “Text Book of Yoga”,(2004) Penguin Books.
Harvey, Paul “Yoga for Everybody”, (2001)Tucker Slingsby Publisher Ltd.
Sharma, Lalita “All You Wanted to Know About Yoga”, (1991)Sterling Publisher Pvt. Ltd.
Kuvalayananda.”Asanas.”Popular Prakashan, Bombay.
Kuvalayananda.”Pranayama.”Popular Prakashan, Bombay.
Kuvalayananda AND Vinekar, S.L.”Yogic Therapy.”Central Bureau of Health Services, Ministry of Health,
Govt of India, New Delhi.
“Yoga Se Arogya.” Indian Yoga Society,Sagar.
“Yoga Mimasa.” Journal No. I to XIX, Kaivalyadhama Lonavala.
Yogeshwar.”Text Book of Yoga.” Yoga Centre, Mylopore, Madras.
82
B.PEd.-THIRD YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
HOCKEY
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15 Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of hockey and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute including important national and
international tournaments.
3. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
4. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
5. International rules and regulations of the game.
6. Importance of hygiene for a hockey player.
7. Etiquette.
8. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Grip of Stick and Stance,
Rolling the Ball,
Dribbling,
Hitting the Ball,
Stopping the Ball,
Pushing the Ball,
Flick,
Jab,
Scoop,
Passing the Ball – Forward/straight pass, triangular pass and square pass.
Drills and lead - up games related with the skill taught.
ADVANCE SKILLS:-
Reverse hit and hitting on the wrong foot.
Stopping the ball – on the right side, on the left side and in the air.
Pushing the ball on the wrong foot.
Reverse flick.
Dodging (through the legs, right and left sides).
Tackling - from front, right and left sides.
Passing – through pass, diagonal pass and return pass.
Common bully.
Positional play in attack and defense.
Drills and lead-up games.
Evaluation Plan(equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
83
Books Recommended for Study
Aora, Monica “ Hockey Coaching Manual (2005) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Tronson, Mark, “ Esanda’s World Hockey” (1984) International Hockey Federation Publishing.
Ahmad Khan, Eraj.” Hokey for Boys and Girls.”(1976), Scientific Book Company, Patna, Bihar.
Flint, Rachael, H. ”Women’s Hockey.”(1976),Pelham Books Ltd. London.
Kapur. ”Rules of Hockey with Interpretations – Boys and Girls.”(1975).
Milford, D.S. ”Hockey Practice and Tactics.”(1949),Edward Arnold and Company,
London.
Singh,Gian and Walia Kuku.”Learn Hockey-This Way.”(1975), International Hockey Institute, New Delhi,
India.
Thani, Yograj.”Hockey.” 1976.
Wein, Horts.”The Science of hockey.”(1979). Pelham Books Ltd. London.
84
B.PEd.-THIRD YEAR
PART-B( Activity – Skill and Prowess)
CRICKET
Max.Marks: 75 Marks
Practical : 60 Marks
Internal Assessment: 15Marks
Objectives:-
1. Introduction of cricket and its historical development with special reference to India.
2. Important personalities of national and international repute including important national and
international tournaments.
3. Importance of general and specific warming-up, lead-up/recreational games and limbering
down/cooling down.
4. Knowledge of equipment of international standard required for the game.
5. To familiarize with methods of construction, lay-out and marking of cricket field and pitch.
6. International rules and regulations of the game.
7. Importance of hygiene for a cricket player.
8. Etiquette.
9. Tests/evaluation plan.
FUNDAMENTAL SKILLS
Batting(Grip, stance and strokes)Strokes in front of the wicket:-
Straight drive, forward defensive stroke, backward defensive stroke, Forward off drive, forward on
drive, forward cut and square cut.
Batting-Strokes behind the wicket:-
Late cut, hook and leg glance.
Bowling (Breaks):-
Off break, leg break and goggle.
Bowling (Spin):-
Spin bowling – Off spin bowling and leg spin bowling; short ball and long ball.
Fielding:-
Defensive fielding (orthodox and un-orthodox) and offensive field.
Catching:-
High catching and slip catching.
Stopping and throwing technique
Wicket keeping technique
Drills and lead-up games.
Evaluation Plan(Equal distribution of marks)
(a) Performance Test,
(b) Oral/written Test.
(c) Professional Attitude, and
(d) Assignments.
Books Recommended for Study
Aora, Monica “ Cricket Coaching Manual (2005) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Srivastava, V.K. “ Analysis of Cricket” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House, Ansari
Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
Hibra,E.B.”Cricket.”N.I.S. Publishing House,Patiala,Punjab.
John Snow.”cricket.”(1975),William Dusmoby Publisher Ltd.London.
Mustaq,M.S.”How to Play Cricket.”(1981), Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.
The Cricket Coaching Manual By: Frank Tyson.
85
B.P.Ed.-THIRD YEAR
PART-C( TEACHING PRACTICE)
TEACHING PRACTICE
Max.Marks: 200 Marks
Practical : 160 Marks
Internal Assessment: 40Marks
Objectives:-
1. Importance of teaching practice in physical education.
2. To develop efficiency in the conduct and teaching of physical activities of formal nature.
3. To prepare the student-teacher to face the students in theory as well as activity classes.
4. To provide practical experience to prepare lesson plan for teaching Free Hand Exercises
emphasizing on physical fitness, rhythmic sense and neuro-muscular co- - ordination.
5. To provide practical experience to prepare lesson plan for theory/knowledge lesson for teaching
subject in the class room.
6. to teach and provide experience for organized physical education activities, emphasizing on skill
learning, leadership, orderly behaviour and enjoyment.
7. To develop the skill of teaching of students of different age groups and different gender.
8. To prepare the students to handle the class of different durations.
9. To familiarize with different Teaching-Aids.
10. To prepare the student-teacher to handle the class effectively and efficiently during the
university examination in the presence of the external examiner/s.
Review of the syllabus taught in B.P.ED.-FIRST and SECOND YEAR
FORMAL LESSONS (Ten lessons in each area –Athletics, games, calisthenics and theory)
During B.P.Ed.- Second Year student-teachers have already been oriented to field as well as class
room teaching. In B.P.Ed.-third year, it will be added with formal teaching work (theory and practical)
in the adopted schools that will be a full syllabus of school teaching –Secondary and Senior Secondary
schools.
ACTIVITY / SKILL LESSON(An activity lesson will comprise of the following parts):-
1. Preliminary and preparatory steps of an activity/skill lesson plan –Name of the institution, Nature of
the lesson (General/Specific), lesson No., date, time, duration, name and roll no. of students,
name of the activity, skill to be taught, required play field, required equipment etc.
2. Objectives – General and specific.
3. Main parts of a lesson-Time, contents, procedure and organization.
4. Sub-parts of a lesson – Introductory part, main part, recreation/lead-up part and concluding part.
THEORY/KNOWLEDE LESSON (A theory/knowledge lesson will comprise of the following parts):-
1. Preliminary and preparatory steps of a theory/knowledge lesson plan: Lesson No, Date, Name
of the Institution, Class with Section, Subject, Unit, Topic, Type/Nature of Lesson Time and duration,
Name of Student-Teacher, Class & Roll No.
2. Objectives: General and Specific.
3. Teaching Aids: as per the requirement of subject contents to be taught.
4. Assumed Previous Experience/s: Related with topic to be taught.
5. Motivational Techniques: To maintain the interest of the students in learning the topic.
86
6. Statement of Objective/s: Topic of the day is to be disclosed.
7. Presentation: Teaching points, Teacher’s Activities – Methods, Techniques, Devices and
Procedure to be employed.
8. Students’/Pupils’ Activities: For better and effective learning, active participation/ involvement
of students must be ensured repeatedly.
9. Recapitulation: Whatever is taught is to be repeated briefly.
10. Class Work: To know the status of learning, the students are given class work on the spot and the
learning level is adjudged and the result is used as feedback for future teaching.
EVALUATION OF A LESSON PLAN-The following aspects of a lesson may be evaluated:
1. Planning of the lesson,
2. Teaching Ability of the Student-Teacher,
3. Class Control,
4. Pupils’ Response,
5. Resourcefulness of the Student-Teacher, and
6. Personality of the Student-Teacher.
CRITERIA FOR THE EVALUATION/ASSESSMENT OF A LESSON-The quality of teaching may be
evaluated/assessed through the following points:-
1. Preparation of a lesson plan,
2. Selection of suitable activity/skill/topic etc.,
3. Creativity,
4. Marking of the area in case of activity or skill teaching and preparation of class room in case of
class room teaching,
5. Appearance – dress-up, grooming etc.
6. Presentation, demonstration and explanation,
7 Use of formations, apparatus, drum, music, whistle, teaching aids etc,
8. Position of the student-teacher,
9. Command, voice and confidence in teaching,
10. Discipline and class control,
11. Class management,
12. Detection and correction of mistakes,
13. Safety precautions, and
14. Overall impression.
IMPORTANT NOTE:-Each student-teacher is required to take ten lessons in each area of examination, i.e.
class room teaching, athletic, games and calisthenics in the current academic session. Each lesson will be
evaluated out of 50 marks, each which includes 20% internal assessment component.
87
TITLES OF THE SUBJECTS FOR BACHELOR OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
(B.P.Ed.) – FOUR-YEAR PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMME
B.P.Ed. FOURTH YEAR (THEORY) – PART -A (Annexure-D)
1. Organisational Behaviour (Paper-XXI)
2. Sports Journalism (Paper-XXII)
3. Yoga (Paper-XXIII).
4. Scientific Approach to Sports Training (Paper-XXIIV).
5. Health, Physical Fitness and Aerobics (Paper-XXV).
6. Officiating and Coaching (Paper-XXVI).
7. Applied Physiotherapy and Rehabilitation (Paper-XXVII).
Note:
1. Scheme of study of Part-A (Theory) & Part-D (Specializations) and Part-E (Internship) is
given in Annexure-D, followed by Syllabus of Part-A (Theory)
2. Syllabus for Part-D (Specializations) and Instructions for Part-E (Internship in the schools)
are given in Annexure-IV at the end of the theory syllabus.
88
ANNEUXRE-D
(Study Scheme of Part-A, D and E)
B.P. Ed – Fourth Year
Part-A (Theory)
Paper Title of the subjects with code Credit Marks Internal
Assessment
Paper-XXI Organisational Behaviour (OB) 1 90 10
Paper-XXII Sports Journalism (SJ) 1 70+20p* 10
Paper-XXIII Yoga (YG) 1 90 10
Paper-XXIV Scientific Approach to Sports
Training (SAST)
1 90 10
Paper-XXV Health, Physical Fitness and
Aerobics (HPFA)
1 90 10
Paper-XXVI Officiating and Coaching (OC) 1 90 10
Paper-XXVII Applied Physiotherapy and
Rehabilitations (APR)
1 70+20p* 10
* P – Stands for marks for practical component
Part-D (Compulsory Fields of Specializations)
Specializations Contents of
Specializations
Credit Marks Internal
Assessment
Athletics Coaching and
Officiating
1 40+40=80 20
Game (A Game of Choice of the
Student (Hockey, Football,
Basketball, Volleyball, Cricket,
Swimming, Badminton, Kabaddi,
Kho-Kho, Boxing and Lawn
Tennis as per the syllabus
-do- 1 40+40=80 20
Options-Health Fitness and Gym
Management or Yoga or Training
for Life Guard for Water Sports –
as per the syllabus
1. Emphasis of
Health and Fitness
Through Physical
Works-outs
(strength/ cardio /
aerobics / flexibility
etc.) and Diet.
2. Yoga as a life
(Theory and
Practice)
3. Emphasis on Life
Saving Drills
1 40+40=80 20
Important instructions for the student / teachers / external examiners:
1. 3x10=30 lessons (Coaching and Officiating) shall be taken by each student under the supervision of
the teacher in the institution itself.
2. Principal of the college with the consultation of the Head, Department of Physical Education of the
college will inform the university about the options exercised by the students to appoint external
examiners accordingly.
3. A set of external and internal examiners will conduct annual university examination as per the rules
and regulations of the course.
4. Each lesson will be of 100 marks including 20 marks of internal assessment. The
examination will be held out of 80 marks (40 marks officiating and 40 marks coaching
including viva voce) for athletics and game lessons. Similarly for optional activities,
89
examination will be held out of 80 marks (40 marks for practical and 40 marks for
theory and viva voce).
5. Each student is required to pass separately in theory, practical and respective assessment.
6. Six hours per day will be devoted for theory and practice, i.e. three hours for theory and three hours
for practical work / day.
Part E (Internship)
Internship of three months duration is compulsory in the schools for which A CERTIFICATE will be
issued by the Principal of the College stating that so and so has completed his / her internship of three months
duration from ________ to _______ at __________ school.
Note: for correction
Each specialization will be of 100 marks including 20 marks of internal assessment.
The examination will be held out of 80 marks (40 marks for practical and 40 marks for theory
and viva voce).
90
SYLLABUS FOR
B.P.Ed.-Fourth Year
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXI
Time : 3 Hrs.
ORGANISATIONAL
BEHAVIOUR
(OB)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90
Pass Marks : 36
Internal Assessment : 10
NOTE:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over five units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short-answer type questions spread
over the entire syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each
question will carry two marks.
c) Rest of the Paper shall contain Four Units. Each Unit of the Syllabus required to be covered
in respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each Unit (Unit II-IV) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal
choice, i.e. the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit I
Entire Syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type
question in First Question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit II
Organizational Behaviour: - Concept, Meaning, Definition and Nature of Organizational
Behaviour, Other Fields of Study-Sociology, Psychology, Management, Physical Education &
Sports. Models of Organizational Behaviour. Challenges and Opportunities for Organizational
Behaviour. Individual Behaviour – Foundations of Individual Behaviour. Models of Man, Individual
Behaviour and Performance.
Unit III
Personality: - Introduction, Meaning, Determinants, Theories of Personality and Impact of
Personality on Organisational Behaviour.
Perception: - Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Nature, Perceptual Process. Managing the
Perceptual Process.
Attitudes & Values: - Introduction, Meaning, Definition & Components of Attitudes, Functions,
Types and Attitude Formation. Meaning and Importance, Types and Change of Attitudes. Meaning,
Definition, Importance, Types and Sources of Values and Organizational Behaviour.
Organisational Behaviour Modification: Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Steps, Utilities and
Application of Organisational Behaviour Modification.
Unit IV
91
Motivation:- Introduction, Meaning & Definition, Importance, Theories of Motivation,
Management of Motivation.
Leadership:- Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Characteristics of Leadership, Dynamics of
Managerial Leadership, Transition of Leadership Theories. Power & Politics.
Communication:- Introduction, Meaning & Definition. Nature of Communication. Barriers to
Communication & Making Communication Effective. Overcoming Barriers to Communication.
Morale:- Introduction, Meaning & Definition. Causes & Warning Signs of Low Morale. Factors
in Improving Morale.
Unit V
Group Dynamics:-Introduction & Definition of Group Dynamics. Team Building & Group
Dynamics. Working Team & Team Effectiveness. Intra-Team Dynamics. Inter-Group Relations.
Factors Affecting Group Cohesiveness. Interpersonal Behaviour (Transactional Analysis), Benefits
and Utility of Transactional Analysis.
Management of Change:- Introduction, Meaning, Definition, Types & Forces for Change.
Managing the Planned Change. Human Reactions to Change.
Management of Stress:- Introduction, Meaning, Nature & Sources of Stress, Consequences of
Stress and Coping Strategies for Stress.
Management of Conflict:- Introduction, Meaning and Definition of Conflict, Conflict, Competition
and Rivalry. Important things related with Conflict, Causes, Signs, Stages and Management of
Conflict.
References:-
1. “Organisation Behaviour (1996) Stephen Robbins New Delhi, Prentice Hall.
2. “Organisational Behaviour” Fred Luthans (1997) New York, Mc Graw Hill.
3. “Organisational Behaviour; Human Behaviour at Work” Keith Davis & John
W.Newstorm (1997) New York, Mc Graw Hill.
4. “Behavioural Process in Organisation” Pareek Udai (1981) New Delhi, Oxford & IBH
Publishing Co.
5. “Organisational Behaviour” Shashi K.Gupta & Rosy Joshi. (2008) Kalyani Publishers,
Ludhiana(PB).
92
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. Ed. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXII
Time : Three Years
SPORTS JAURNALISM
Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 28 Marks
Practical : 20 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First
question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Meaning, definition and concept of journalism.
• Historical background of journalism.
• Introduction to Mass Media; Print, Electronic and Informal media.
• Role of Journalism in society.
• Role of IT in Journalism.
Unit-III
• Definition of news, basic news elements and values, news story.
• Qualities and responsibilities of sports news reporters.
• Organisation of sports news desk.
• Duties and responsibilities of sports sub editor, photo journalist.
Unit-IV
• Amateurism v/s professionalism: invasion of private life, emphasis on winning, sportsmanship and
sports for charity.
• Writing Sports Features: Types of sports features, exclusive features, fearless writing in sports, sports
personalities and their thumb nail sketches.
• Interviewing sports persons.
Unit-V
• Reviewing sports books
• Writing sports editorials.
• Writing weekly or fortnightly column.
• Covering local / national sports competitions.
• Covering sports for radio and television channels (Art of Commentating)
Practical Work: (Project reports to be prepared, evaluated and viva voce conducted by the teacher
concerned).
1. Writing press releases.
93
2. Writing script for interviews with sportspersons. Writing sports stories with a view to promote sports in
community.
3. Writing sports editorial.
Suggestions for Teaching
1. The teacher needs to be very resourceful to arrange visits of students to various News offices to
acquire first hand experience in writing Sports News.
Reference Books
• Mishra, Sharad “ Text Book of Sports Journalism”( 2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6,23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi
• Sita Ram , “Text Book of Sports Journalism”, “(2004) Friends Publication, 6, Mukerjee Tower, Dr.
Mukerjee Nagar-Delhi
• Conrad .C. Fink, Sports Wing, Surjeet Publication, 7 Kholapur Road, Kamala Nagar, Delhi.
• Ahuja, B.N. and Chhabra, S.S. “Principles and Techniques of Journalism”, Surjeet Publication, 7
Kholapur Road, Kamala Nagar, Delhi
• Keval. J. Kumar, “Mass Communication in India”,2004, Jaico Publishing House-121, Mahatma
Gandhi Road, Mumbai-400023.
• Agarwal,V.B AND Gupta, V.S Handbook of Journalism and mass comm.. 2001, Concept publishing
company.
94
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. ED. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXIII
Time : Three Hours
YOGA Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 28 Marks
Practical Marks : 20 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each Unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e.
the students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in first Question/Unit of
the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II :
• Introduction.
• Historical background and Origin of Yoga.
• Meaning and Concept of Yoga and its relationship with Physical Education and Sports.
• Yoga in present global scenario; Yoga as a Science; and recent advances in Yoga.
• Contribution of Modern Yogis: Ramakrishana Parmahamsa, Yogananda, Swami
Vivekananda, Swami Sivananda, Swami Satyananda and Srila Prabhupad.
Unit-III :
• Relevance of Patanjali’s “Asthangyog in 21th century.
• Main Yogic Texts: Vedas & Upanishad, Hathayoga Pradeepika, Gheranda Samhitta, Yoga
Sutra and Shrimad Bhagvad Gita.
• Yoga as activity: i) Yam, ii) Niyama, iii) Asanas, iv) Pranayama, v) Pratyahar.
• Yoga as Relaxation: vi) Dharna, vii) Dhayan and viii) Samadhi.
Unit-IV : Meditation & Shat Kriyas:
• Meaning, Definition, Types and Techniques of Meditation.
• Shat Kriyas of Yoga: Neti; Dhauti; Basti, Nauli, Kapalbhati and Trataka.
Unit-V
• Bandhs and Mudras; Aim, objectives and benefits. Physiological aspects of various bandhs and
mudras.
• Therapeutic and Corrective Values of Yoga Practices special reference to disease like: Diabetes,
Asthma, Constipation, Obesity, Cervical, Gastric and Acidity.
Practical Part:
• Asanas, Pranayam, Mudras, Bandhs and Kiryas
• Meditation Techniques, Yoga therapy and special techniques.
95
Reference Books
• Debnath, Monica “Basic Core Fitness through Yoga and Naturopathy” (2006-07) Sports Publication,
G-6,23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Yogeswar, “Text Book of Yoga”,(2004) Penguin Books.
• Harvey, Paul “Yoga for Everybody”, (2001)Tucker Slingsby Publisher Ltd.
• Sharma, Lalita “All You Wanted to Know About Yoga”, (1991)Sterling Publisher Pvt. Ltd.
• Sarawati, S Satyananda “Asana, Pranayam, Mudra and Bandhas”.
• Iyengar, B.K.S. “The Illustrated Light of Yoga”(1982) Great Britain, George Allenand Unwin.
• Osho, “Dhayan Vigyan” A Rebel Book, (2005)Tao Publishing Pvt. Ltd., 50 Koregoan Park , Pune-
411001, MS India.
• Osho, “144 Meditation” A Rebel Book, (2006)Tao Publishing Pvt. Ltd., 50 Koregoan Park , Pune-
411001, MS India.
• Osho, “Meditation the First and the Last Freedom”(2006) A Rebel Book, Tao Publishing Pvt. Ltd.,
50 Koregoan Park , Pune-411001, MS India.
96
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. ED. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXIV
Time : Three Years
SCIENTIFIC APPROACH TO
SPORTS TRAINING
Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 36 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in first
Question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• History of Science of Sports Training, Meaning, definition, aim, objectives and characteristics of sports
training and conditioning.
• Functions and subject matter of science of sports training.
• Training Load and its types. Structure of training load. Principles of training load. Principles of
Intensity and volume. Adaptation – meaning and process.
• Planning and Periodisation of Training: Meaning and their types. Development of competitive sports in
India.
Unit-III
• Physical and Motor Fitness: Meaning of physical fitness and motor fitness; Components of physical
and motor fitness; means and methods of their development.
• Warming-up and cooling down and their benefits. Training Methods (Continuous Running / Training,
Interval Training, Fartlek Running / Training, Circuit, Alternate, Weight Training and Competition and
Test); Their variables and characteristics.
• Meaning of plyometrics, cross training, sports stretch / flexibility and their benefits.
Unit-IV
• Conditions of achieving a high standard of athletic efficiency. Identification of Talent: Pre-requisites
and conditions for developing suitable young athlete, principles of early recognition of athletic talent,
basic factors determining performance and important indicators to determine athlete’s aptitude.
• Age related specific characteristics of anatomical, physiological, psychological and motor
development of children and adults.
• Factors Affecting Sports Performance: Physical factors: Climate, Nutrition, Smoking, Sex Sleep and
Pharmacological aids; physiological factors: Blood cells, muscle fibers, heart size, and lungs size;
psychological factors; Stress, tension and anxiety.
Unit-V
• Energy for performance – Concept of energy, sources of energy (Carbohydrate, protein, and fat),
training diet, competition nutrition (pre-competition, during competition and after competition) and food
for recovery.
• Ergogenic Aids: Antioxidant supplements, protein supplements, meal replacement products, creatine,
glutamine, pre-hormones, ephedrine, caffeine. Creatine as an ergogenic aid.
• Athlete’s protein needs and myths.
97
Reference Books
• Sharma, N.P. “Sports Science”,(2004) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New Delhi.
• Ronald P. Pfeijjer “Concept of Athletic Training”, (2002)Jones and Bartlett Publishers.
• Bean, Anita “The Complete Guide to Sports Nutrition : How to eat for maximum Performance”,
(2000)3rd Edition, Published by A & C Black Ltd. London.
• Baechle, Thomas R. and Earle Roger W. “Essential Strength Training and Conditioning”,
(2000)Human Kinetic Publisher inc. USA.
• Singh, Hardyal “Science of Sports Training”, (1991) D.V.S. Publication New Delhi– 1991.
• Singh, Hardyal “Scientific Approach of Sports Training”, (1991) D.V.S. Publication New Delhi.
98
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. ED. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXV
Time : Three Years
HEALTH, PHYSICAL FITNESS
AND AEROBICS
Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 36 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in first
Question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Concept of health, definition of health, factors affecting health and dimensions of health.
• Life style-general considerations (food, sleep, work stress, rest and recreation, obesity, physical
fitness and exercise, intellectual activity, health and happiness, home and marriage, religion and
health, social life, alcohol, hot beverage and cold drinks, aging gracefully, and affluence and health.
• Moderation and healthy life style based on simple living and high thinking environment, home,
clothing, diet, work, stress, physical activity, physical fitness, body weight, intellectual activity, sexual
activity, personal habits, pregnancy and lactation, identification of chronic disease and preventive
measures.
• Factors responsible for heart problem: Life style, psychological and social factors, behavioral
conditions, geographical conditions and economical condition. Preventive measures for heart
problems.
Unit-III
• Meaning and definitions of physical fitness, health related fitness, motor fitness, wellness and wellbeing.
• Components of fitness and their description: Physical fitness, health related fitness, motor fitness, and
wellness.
• Aim, objectives, and means and methods of development of fitness components.
• Fitness Testing-Cardio respiratory capacity, flexibility, muscular strength, muscular endurance, speed,
power, agility and body composition.
Unit-IV
• Weight Training or Resistance Training : Concept and benefits of General Warm-up and specific
warm-up, Basic principles of weight training, training goals ( body type’s, basic and dietary goals)
and benefits of weight training.
• Main muscle groups of the bodyChest, upper arm, shoulders, upper back, thigh, abdominal, forearms,
lower back, hip and lower leg.
• Different forms of muscular contractions-Concentric contraction, eccentric contraction, isometric
contraction, iso-kinetic concentration and plyometric muscle action.
99
• Weight training and Women: Increased strength and power, improved sports performance, enhanced
self image and competitive outlet.
Unit-V
• Aerobics; Concept of aerobics, second wind, steady state and oxygen debt, the aerobic exercise
programme (Field and Gym) Brisk walk, jogging, running, rope skipping, swimming, dance, stepper
exercise, jogger, bicycle, treadmill, workouts with light weight. Advantage of swimming over running.
• Nutritional Requirements: Basic nutrition, dietary goals, protein, carbohydrate, fat, vitamins, mineral,
water, fibre; Basic diets: health foods and junk / fast foods.
• Obesity: Causes of obesity and remedial measures.
• Over weight: Causes and remedial measures.
Reference Books:
• Debnath, Monica “Basic Core Fitness through Yoga and Naturopathy” (2006-07) Sports Publication,
G-6,23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
• Barbara, A. Brehn “Successful Fitness: Motivation and Strategies”, (2004)Human Kinetic Publisher
inc. USA.
• Wayne, Viljoen “The Weight Training Hand Book”, (2003)1st Edition, New Holland Publisher.
• Charles, B. Corbin “Fitness for Life”, (2001)Globe Fearon.
• Charles, B. Corbin and et al. “Concept of Physical Fitness”, (2000)10th Edition McGraw Hill
Publication.
• Bean, Anita “The Complete Guide to Sports Nutrition: How to eat for maximum performance”,
(2000) 3rd Edition, Published by A & C Black Ltd. London
• Nigel Champion and Greg Hurst, “The Aerobics Instructor Handbook”-(1999).
100
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. ED. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXVI
Time : Three Years
OFFICIATING AND COACHING Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 90 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 36 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain nine short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 18 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in first
Question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Meaning of officiating and coaching. Nature and scope of officiating and coaching.
• Basic principles of officiating and coaching.
• Qualifications (Educational and Professional) and qualities of a good official.
• Conditions of a good referee / umpire and measures for improving the standard of referee / umpire.
• The Coach: Philosophy of coaching: coaching styles (leadership role); Characteristics of a good
coach. Relationship of a coach and athlete; and bench coaching.
Unit-III
• National and International governing bodies of athletics and their functions.
• Officiating and coaching of athletic events: interpretation of rules and regulations governing the track
and field events including marking procedure of track and field arenas.
• Officials required for conducting a standard athletic meet and their duties and responsibilities.
• Equipment required for conducting each event.
• Dress code for officials.
Unit-IV
• National and international governing bodies of each game and their functions.
• Officiating and Coaching of Games (Hockey, Football, Basketball, Volleyball, Cricket) – Interpretation
of rules and regulations governing each game including marking procedure of play fields / courts.
• Officials required for conducting a standard championship / tournament and their duties and
responsibilities.
• Equipment required for conducting each game.
• Dress code for officials.
Unit-V
• National and international governing bodies of each game and their functions.
• Officiating and Coaching of Games (Badminton, Table Tennis, Kabaddi, Kho-Kho, Handball) –
Interpretation of rules and regulations governing each game including marking procedure of play fields
/ courts.
• Officials required for conducting a standard championship / tournament and their duties and
responsibilities.
101
• Equipment required for conducting each game.
• Dress code for officials.
Reference Books
• Williams Patrick and Diane S., “Becoming A Professional Coach”, (2007)Norton Publication
• Sharma, N.P. “Officiating and Coaching in Sports”, (2005) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New Delhi.
• Tandon, K. “Officiating and Coaching”, Published by Tandon Publication, Book Market, Ludhiana
(PB).
• Rules Books approved by the respective Association/ Federation recognized by IOC/ IOA.
• Singh, Yadwinder “Sports Officiating and Coaching”, (2005) Sports Publication, G-6,23/23B EMCA
House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
102
SYLLABUS FOR B.P. ED. – FOURTH YEAR
B.P. Ed. : Fourth Year
Paper : XXVII
Time : Three Years
APPLIED PHYSIOTHERAPY
AND REHABILITATION
Max Marks : 100
Theory / Written : 70 Marks
Min Pass Marks : 28 Marks
Practical : 20 Marks
Internal Assessment : 10 Marks
Note:
a) There shall be nine questions in all spread over Five Units of the question paper.
b) First Question/Unit is compulsory. It will contain seven short- answer type questions spread over the
whole syllabus to be answered in about 25-30 words. It will carry 14 marks, i.e. each question will
carry two marks.
c) Rest of the paper shall contain Four Units. Each unit of the syllabus required to be covered in
respective four units of the question paper.
d) Each unit (Unit II to V) shall have two questions and the students shall be given internal choice i.e. the
students shall attempt one question from each unit.
e) All Units/Questions will carry equal marks.
Unit –I
Entire syllabus given in the Unit-II to IV will be covered to set short-answer type questions in First
question/Unit of the Question Paper which is compulsory.
Unit-II
• Meaning and definition of physiotherapy. Concept of athletic trainer and sports physician.
• Role of physical education teacher / coaches in athlete’s care and rehabilitation.
• Team medical care, its concept and approaches. Hygiene in campus and competitions.
• Massage: meaning, physiological effects, points to be considered in massage, types of massage
(Stroking manipulation, effleurage, pressure manipulation, kneading, petrisage, friction, percussion
manipulation, hacking, clapping, beating, pounding, and shaking manipulation). Contradiction of
massage.
Unit-III
• Posture, definition, concept and fundamental positions (lying, sitting, standing, reading and writing).
• Cause, affects and disadvantage of poor posture and values of good posture.
• Postural Deviations: Meaning types (Round Shoulder, Kyphosis, Lordosis, Scioliosis, Knock-knee,
bowlegs and flat-foot) their causes and corrective exercises.
Unit-IV
• Common athletic injuries: Sprains, strains, contusions, abrasions and fracture, their causes,
symptoms, treatment and preventive measures.
• Drugs and doping: History, definition and classification.
• Role of managers, coaches, national and international agencies and social organizations in controlling
the drug and doping problems.
Unit-V
• Basic concept of physiotherapeutic technique such as: hydrotherapy, thermotherapy, hot and cold
packs, whirlpool, contrast bath, paraffin bath, infrared, short wave diathermy and ultra sound.
• Indications and contra-indications of each technique.
• Role of ice in treatment in sports injuries.
• Concept of health club, sauna bath, steam bath and health related massage.
103
Practical Work: (Project reports to be prepared, evaluated and viva voce conducted by the teacher
concerned)
1. Practical classes for various techniques of massage to be conducted in the lab.
2. Practical classes for different physiotherapy techniques.
3. Practical classes for corrective exercises.
Reference Books
• Brown D. W. and Sandra White, “The Complete Guide to Aromatherapy: Massage and
Reflexology”,(2005) Quantum Publishing Ltd.
• Narayan, S. Lakshmi, “Text Book of Therapeutic Exercise”, (2005) Jaypee Brothers-2005.
• Goel, R.N. “Physiotherapy” (VOL.1-2) 1ST Edition- (2000).
• Gungburg, Robert “Current Concepts in Prevention, Diagnosis and Treatment of the Cervical
Whiplash Syndrome”, (1998) Lippincott- Raven Publusher.
104
ANNEXURE-IV
B.P. ED. FOURTH YEAR
PART-D: (Specialization Fields)
Officiating and Coaching Lessons Max. Marks : 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment : 20 Marks
Objectives
1. Importance of Officiating and Coaching in Sports.
2. To develop efficiency in the conduct of tournament and bring about technical expertise in athletics
events.
3. To prepare the student-teacher for coaching and officiating jobs.
4. To provide practical experience to prepare officiating and coaching lesson paln for track and field
events.
5. To familiarize the student-teacher with different officiating and coaching techniques.
ATHLETICS
General Knowledge
(1) Meaning of Athletics / Track and Field and athlete.
(2) History of Athletics (World / India)
(3) Analytical view of performance of Indian athletes (Men and Women) at the international scene.
(4) Critical analysis of priorities of Government (State / Centre) for the promotion of athletics in the
country.
(5) Amateurism v/s professionalism in athletics and their long term affects.
(6) National and International Athletics Organisations and their respective role in the promotion of
athletics.
(7) Drug/ doping in athletics and national / international dope controlling bodies and their success/
failures.
(8) Sports awards / honours.
Technical Knowledge
Marking of 400 meters and 200 meter tracks including field arenas.
Specialized Knowledge
1. Energy Source, Biomechanical concepts involved in running, jumping and throwing events.
2. Officiating and coaching with each event (interpretation of rules and regulations).
3. Fundamental skills-full description of technique and tactics (sprints, hurdles, running , jumping,
throwing, walk, long distance running including cross country, road races, road walk and marathon).
4. Guidelines for selection / talent identification criteria for sprinters, middle and long distance, runners,
hurdlers (low and high hurdles), jumping and throwing events.
5. Background of each event and development of general and specific physical fitness / motor fitness.
6. Concepts of warming up and cooling down and their physiological and psychological benefits.
7. Principles of sport training and conditioning physical and physiological training, technical training,
tactical training, psychological training and theoretical training and variables of training.
8. Plyometric Training: its concept, plyometric programme (lower body plyometrics, upper body
plyometrics and middle body plyometrics).
9. Cross Training – meaning benefits and necessity of cross training.
10. Rest and recovery – its factors / causes and techniques.
11. Fatigue, over training and burnout types causes, monitoring, treating and preventing over training and
burnouts.
12. Methods of training, planning, loading, periodisation, adaptation, and super compensation cycle.
13. Factors facilitating for peaking for competitions.
105
14. Athletes’ care (Rehabilitation and Reconditioning and diet during training, pre-competition, during
competition and post competition special reference to water and carbohydrate loading.
Evaluation Plan (Officiating and Coaching Lesson):
Criteria for the evaluation / assessment of a lesson. The quality of coaching lesson may be evaluated /
assessed through the following points:
1. Preparation of a lesson plan.
2. Selection of suitable activity / skill / topics etc.
3. Creativity.
4. Marking of the area in case of activity or skill coaching and officiating.
5. Appearance – dress-up, grooming etc.
6. Presentation, demonstration and explanation.
7. Use of formations, apparatus, whistle, officiating and coaching aids etc.
8. Position of the student teacher.
9. Command, voice and confidence in officiating and coaching.
10. Discipline and class control.
11. Class management.
12. Detection and correction of mistakes.
13. Safety precautions.
14. Overall impressions.
15. Performance Test.
16. Written / viva voce.
17. Professional attitude, and
18. Record Book.
Reference Books
1. Singh, Baljeet “Athletic Conditioning” (2006-07) Sports Publication, G-6, 23/23B EMCA House,
Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
2. Novich M. Max, “Training & Conditioning of Athletes.” (1983)Lea & Febriger 600S. Washington
Square Philadelphia, PA 19106, USA
3. Bosen,Ken O.,”Track and Field Fundamental Techniques”, Patiala:N.I.S. Publication.
4. Dyson, Geoffrey HG, Edumndson, Joseph, “Athletics for Schools.” (1969) University of London
Press Ltd..
5. Doherty, J. Mannet, “Track&Field” Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice Hall Inc.
6. Dyoon, Geoffrey, G.H. The Mechanic of Athletics (1962) London University of London press Ltd.
7. Hodks, Gens.Application off Weight Training to Athletics (1962) Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice
Hall Inc.
8. Malhotra, Ashok Kumar A Guide to be an Athlete, Krishna Publication Books New Delhi.
9. Mohan, V.M. Athletics for beginners, Metropolitan Books New Delhi.
106
GAMES (One game of the choice of the students – Hockey, Football, Basketball, Volleyball, Cricket,
Swimming, Badminton, Kabaddi and Kho-Kho and Boxing)
Max. Marks : 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment : 20 Marks
Objectives
1. Importance of Officiating and Coaching in Sports.
2. To develop efficiency in the conduct of tournament and bring about technical expertise in athletics
events.
3. To prepare the student-teacher for coaching and officiating jobs.
4. To provide practical experience to prepare officiating and coaching lesson paln for track and field
events.
5. To familiarize the student-teacher with different officiating and coaching techniques.
General Knowledge
1. Meaning of games and sport.
2. History of respective game (World/ India).
3. Analytical view of performance of Indian in respective game (Men and Women) at the international
scene.
4. Critical analysis of priorities of Government (State / Centre) for the promotion of game and sport in the
country.
5. Amateurism v/s professional in games/ sports and their long term affects.
6. National and International Organisation of game / sport (Association / Federation) and their respective
role in the promotion of athletics.
7. Drug / doping in games / sports and national / international dope controlling bodies and their success /
failures.
8. Sports awards / honours.
Technical Knowledge
Marking of respective play fields / court.
Specialized Knowledge
1. Energy Source, Biomechanical concepts involved in respective game / sport.
2. Officiating and coaching of respective game / sport (interpretation of rules and regulations)
3. Fundamental skills-full description of skill, technique and tactics involved in respective game / sport.
4. Systems of play.
5. Guidelines for selection / talent identification criteria for respective game/ sport.
6. Background of respective game and development of general and specific physical fitness / motor
fitness.
7. Concepts of warming up and cooling down and their physiological and psychological benefits.
8. Principles of sport training and conditioning - Physical and physiological training, technical training,
tactical training, psychological training and theoretical training and variables of training.
9. Plyometric Training: its concept, plyometric programme (lower body plyometrics, upper body
plyometrics and middle body plyometrics).
10. Cross Training – meaning, benefits and necessity of cross training.
11. Rest and recovery – its factors / causes and techniques.
12. Fatigue, over training and burnout - types causes, monitoring, treating and preventing over training
and burnouts.
13. Methods of training, planning, loading, periodisation, adaptation, and supercompensation cycle.
14. Factors facilitating for peaking for competitions.
15. Sportsmen’s care (Rehabilitation and Reconditioning) and diet during training, pre-competition, during
competition and post competition special reference to water and carbohydrate loading.
Evaluation Plan (Officiating and Coaching Lesson)
107
Criteria for the evaluation / assessment of a lesson – The Quality of coaching lesson may be evaluated /
assessed through the following points:
1. Preparation of a lesson plan.
2. Selection of suitable activity / skill/ topic etc.
3. Creativity
4. Marking of the area in case of activity or skill of coaching and officiating.
5. Appearance – dress-up, grooming etc.
6. Presentation, demonstration and explanation.
7. Use of formations, apparatus, whistle, officiating and coaching aids etc.
8. Position of the student teacher.
9. Command, voice and confidence, whistle, officiating and coaching.
10. Discipline and class control.
11. Class management.
12. Detection and correction of mistakes.
13. Safety precautions.
14. Overall impression.
15. Written / viva voce.
16. Professional attitude, and
17. Record Book
Reference
1. Williams Patrick and Diane S., “Becoming A Professional Coach”, (2007)Norton Publication
2. Sharma, N.P. “Officiating and Coaching in Sports”, (2005) Khel Sahitya Kendra, New Delhi.
3. Tandon, K. “Officiating and Coaching”, Published by Tandon Publication, Book Market, Ludhiana
(PB).
4. Rules Books approved by the respective Association/ Federation recognized by IOC/ IOA.
5. Singh, Yadwinder “Sports Officiating and Coaching”, (2005) Sports Publication, G-6,23/23B
EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
6. Marley, William, P., “Health and Physical Fitness: Taking Charge of Youth Health” First Edition
1982: Published by CBS College Publishing; 383 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 110017.
7. Singh, Hardayal, “Science of Sports Training” 1997: D.V.S. Publications, 100 T.K. Giri Nagar,
Kalkaji, New Delhi-110019.
8. FIBA Rules Book, New Edition
9. FIFA Rule Book, New Edition
10. FIVA Rule Book, New Edition
108
HEALTH, FITNESS AND GYM MANAGEMENT
Max. Marks : 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment : 20 Marks
Objectives:
1. To prepare professional gym managers for job/ self employment.
2. Importance of study of Health, Fitness and Gym Management.
3. To check health and fitness status of different sections / age groups of Gym Users.
4. Planning of gym compartments.
5. Development of all round fitness.
6. To provide knowledge of gym using.
7. Responsibilities of gym manager.
8. To provide knowledge about diet supplements.
9. To provide knowledge of development of cardio respiratory, strength, weight, control, weight loose,
weight gain, body building / best physique.
10. To provide knowledge about balance diet and dietary requirements for different purposes of gym
exercises.
Contents for Health, Fitness and Gym Management
1. Health and fitness check-up (Medical / Physical)
2. Exercise guidelines and precautions.
3. Endurance work out and equipment – aerobics, Agility exercises, Arm ergometry, Aqua aerobics,
aqua jogging, bicycling, flexibility exercises, plyometrics, rope jumping, rowing machine, running, star
stepping, vibratory, swimming, treadmill, versa climber, weight training/ strength training.
4. Basic principles of strength training.
5. Fundamentals of strength training : Technique, breathing, stabilizing, grips (types of grip) weight belts,
spotting, preparation, lowering, weights, range of motion, speed of execution.
6. Requirements for Effective Strength (Resistance) Training: Medical clearance, technique and posture,
and discipline.
7. Safety in weight Room Adding and removing weights, spotting, moving around the weight room, and
equipment storage.
8. Basic Safety Measures: Warm up Sets/ Cooling down (General warming up, specific warming-up and
cooling down), technique, bouncing, no pain no gain, protect the knees, protect back, etiquette,
equipment set-up, hand towel, and time on equipment.
9. Strength Training Exercises: Core exercises, structural exercises, power exercises, auxiliary
exercises.
10. Methods of Weight Training: Load / resistance (Training goal and load), Repetitions (Training goal and
load), Rest periods (Training goal and rest periods) and sets (Training goal and number of sets)
11. Exercise Programme: Weight Loss Cardio respiratory, strength training, physiotherapy unit, muscle
tone up, weight training, body building etc.)
12. Understanding flexibility benefits of stretching. Affects of aging on flexibility.
13. Major muscles of the body for training: Chest, upper arm, shoulders, upper back, thigh, abdominal,
forearms, lower back, hip and lower leg.
14. Designing Women-Strength Training origins and evolution; benefits of strength training for women
(increased strength, increased muscle mass and decreased body fat, increased bone density,
improve immune function, revised effects of aging, improved mood and increased confidence,
improved quality of life and stronger not bigger.
15. Body Building: The warm up and cool down: principles and basic laws of strength and body building
training, muscles and training for body building.
16. Cross-training and plyometrics.
17. Diet for various works out – endurance, strength, body building, weight loss and weight gain.
109
Evaluation Plan
1. Performance test.
2. Written / viva voce.
3. Professional attitude, and
4. Record Book.
Reference Books:
1. Anita Bean, “The Complete guide to Sports Nutrition: How to eat for maximum Performance”
Third Edition, (2000) published by A&C Black (Publishers) Ltd., 37 Soho Square, London WID 3QZ.
2. R. Kumar, Meenal Kumar and Ganguly, N.K. “Guide to Wellness and Well being”. First Edition,
(2004): Published by Deep & Deep publications Pvt. Ltd. F-159, Rajouri Garden, New Delhi –110027.
3. Thapar, GD “Hints on Health” First Edition, (2002) : Published by Rupa Company, 7/16, Ansari
Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi-110002.
4. Thomas, D. Fahley and Gayle Hutchinson, “Weight Training for Women” First Edition, (1992):
Published by Mayfield Publishing Company-1240 Villa Street, Mountain View, California,-94041.
5. William P. Marley, “Health and Physical Fitness: Taking Charge of Your Health” First Edition,
(1982): Published by CBS College Publishing; 383 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 110017.
6. Wayne Viljoen, “The Weight Training Handbook” First Edition, (2003): Published by New Holland
Publishers.
110
YOGA (One Asana of the choice of the students )
Max. Marks : 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment: 20 Marks
Objectives
1. Importance of yoga and meditation in one’s life.
2. To develop efficiency in the conduct of yoga session and bring about technical expertise in
yogic / meditative exercises.
3. To prepare the student-teacher for teaching job related with yoga.
4. To provide practical experience to prepare effective teaching / training lesson plan for
meditative exercises / poses.
5. To familiarize the student teacher with different teaching techniques of yogic and yogic
exercises.
Contents of Yoga for Specialization
1. Meaning and concept of Yoga, historical back ground of Yoga.
2. Types of Yoga; a brief discussion.
3. Hatha Yoga; its meaning, concept and philosophy.
- Pranayama and its physiological value.
- Kumbhaka and its physiological value.
- Anulom and Viloma or Nadi Sodhan Pranayama.
- Uijayi, Bhastrika and Kapal Bhati.
- Surya Bhedana and its effects on nervous system.
- Sitali, Pavana, Muktsana and its effects on respiratory system.
4. Astanga Yoga and its description:
- Asanas; Padmasana, Siddhasana, Svastikasana, Samasana, Sukhasana, Yogamudra, Baddhakonasana,
Supta-Vajrasana, Ardha-Matsyendrasana, Vakrasana, Trikonasana, Halasana,
Paschimottasana, Ourtdhva pascimottasana, Padahastasana, Bhujangasana, Arodha-Bhujangasana,
Salbhasana, Ardha-Salbhasana, Dhanurasana, Jalandhara-Bandha, Jihva-Bandha, Mula Bandha,
Uddiyana-Bandha, Nauli, Viparitakarani, Sarvangasana, Ardha-Sarvangasana, Matsyasana,
Sirsasana, Savasana.
5. Asanas for concentration and mental stability:
- Vriksasana, Vatyanasana, Utthita Hasta Padangusthasana, Bakrasana, Utthita Padmasana,
Ekapada Angusthasana, Eka Hasta Bhujasana, Parvatasana,.
6. Medtation, Concentration, Nadis, Chakras and Kundalis; its meaning and concept.
7. Hygiene of Yoga; Neti, Dhauti, Basti, Nauli, Kapal-Bhati, Trataka, Kunja etc.
8. Bandas and Mudras; aim, objectives and benefits. Physiological aspects of various bandhas and
Mudras.
9. Therapeutic and corrective values of Pranayama and Asanas:
- Acidity, Allergy, Anemia, Arthiritis, Asthma, Cold, Constipati, Diabetes, Diarrhea, Exhaustion,
Headaches, Heart trouble, High Blood Pressure, Impotencuy, Indigestion, Low Blood Pressure,
Obesity, Paralysis, Sinus, Tuberculosis, Ulcer.
10. Yogic therapy for various psychological problems:
- Indecision, Haste, Nervousness, excessive touchiness, nightmares, disharmony, obsession,
melancholy, frustration.
11. Balance diet; its meaning and definition. Its importance for Yoga.
12. Classifications of various foodstuffs according to Yoga science.
111
Evaluation Plan
Criteria for the evaluation / assessment of a lesson – The quality of lesson plan may be evaluated / assessed
through the following points:
1. Preparation of a lesson plan.
2. Selection of suitable activity / skill / topic etc.
3. Creativity.
4. Marking of the area in case of activity or skill of coaching and officiating.
5. Appearance – dress up, grooming etc.
6. Presentation, demonstration and explanation.
7. Use of formations, apparatus, whistle, officiating and coaching aids etc.
8. Position of the student teacher.
9. Command, voice and confidence in officiating and coaching.
10. Discipline and class control.
11. Class management.
12. Detection and correction of mistakes.
13. Safety precautions.
14. Overall impressions.
15. Performance test.
16. Written / viva voce.
17. Professional attitude, and
18 Record Book.
Reference Books
1. Debnath, Monica “Basic Core Fitness through Yoga and Naturopathy” (2006-07) Sports Publication,
G-6,23/23B EMCA House, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi.
2. Yogeswar, “Text Book of Yoga”,(2004) Penguin Books.
3. Harvey, Paul “Yoga for Everybody”, (2001)Tucker Slingsby Publisher Ltd.
4. Sharma, Lalita “All You Wanted to Know About Yoga”, (1991)Sterling Publisher Pvt. Ltd.
5. Sri Ananda, “The Complete Book of YOGA Harmony of Body and Mind” 1999; Published by
Orient Paperbacks, Madrasa Road, Kashmere Gate, New Delhi-110006.
6. Vijayendra Patap, “A Teacher’s Guide for Beginning Yoga” Ist Ed. Indian (1987) Published
by SKY Foundation 339 Fitzwater Street, Philadelphia, Pennusyvani, 19147 USA.
7. Mira Mehta, “How to Use Yoga” (2002) Published by Hermes House, Anness Publishing
Limited 89-89 Blackfriars Road, London.
8. Bhanot, T.R., “Know About Yoga” (1995) Published by Dreamland Publications, 4425, nai
Sarak, Delhi-110006.
9. Iyenger, B.K.S, “Light on Yoga” Great Britain (1982) George Allenand, Unwin,.
10. Pratap, Vijayendra; “A Teacher’s Guide for Beginning Yoga” Akash Prakashan, Preet Vihar
Marg, New Delhi.
11. Sharma, Lalita; “All you wanted to know about Yoga” (1999) Sterling Publishes Private
Limited.
12. Sharma, P.D. “Yoga, Yogasana and Pranayama for Health” (1984) Navneet Publications,
Pvt. Ltd. Ahmedabad,.
13. Swami Satyananda Saraswati, “Asana, Pranyama, Mudra, and Bandhas”.
14. Rasolinol Wddowson, “The Hoy of Yoga”.
15. B.K.S. lyengar, “The Illustrated Light of Yoga” (1982)Great Britain, George Allenand Unwin,.
16. James Hewitt, “Teach Yourself Meditation”.
112
Training for Life Guard and Water Sports
Max. Marks : 100 Marks
Practical : 80 Marks
Internal Assessment : 20 Marks
Objectives
1. Importance of life guard and water supports.
2. To technical knowledge regarding life saving drills.
3. To prepare the student-teacher for artificial respiration.
4. To provide practical experience to prepare student to meet any eventuality related with flood.
5. To prepare student for life guard’s job.
Contents for training for life guard for water sports.
1. Meaning of life saving.
2. Equipment required for life saving:
- Life Buoy with stand to hang (approx. 2 mtr. high).
- Life Guard chair (1.8 mtr to 2 mtr high)
- A long rope
- A long bamboo (about 3 mtr. long)
- Artificial resuscitation (respiration) with required directions.
- Life Jacket.
3. Rescue methods:
- Indirect method (using life buoy, rope, bamboo etc.)
- Direct method (direct approach through life guard, coach)
4. Holds and Carry methods:
- Holds
i. Front carry
ii. Release for double grip on one arm.
iii. Release for double grip on two arm.
iv. Release for front head hold
v. Release for rear head hold.
- Carry
i. Pool lift
ii. Fire man’s carry
iii. Saddle back carry
iv. One man drag
v. Two man carry
vi. Three man carry, Australian carry
5. Kiss of life or Mouth to mouth resuscitation (respiration).
6. Life guard duties.
Evaluation Plan
1. Performance Test.
2. Written / viva voce.
3. Professional attitude, and
4. Record Books.
Reference Books:
1. Life guard training: By Nancy R. Delong.
2. Survival swimming and life saving: By Margaret Jervis and Farber and Farber.
3. Life saving and water safety today: By Charles E. Silva.
